diff options
author | Christian Grothoff <christian@grothoff.org> | 2013-05-19 09:31:16 +0000 |
---|---|---|
committer | Christian Grothoff <christian@grothoff.org> | 2013-05-19 09:31:16 +0000 |
commit | f4a4a70d43a3c99915190447356c1080feb8867b (patch) | |
tree | 1ea54452a0fe83354eb94db4f40875facb0414a1 /doc | |
parent | cc8a80bf848d6cb7d1f78ce8d534df4aa4df32e3 (diff) | |
download | libmicrohttpd-f4a4a70d43a3c99915190447356c1080feb8867b.tar.gz libmicrohttpd-f4a4a70d43a3c99915190447356c1080feb8867b.zip |
-remove generated files
Diffstat (limited to 'doc')
-rw-r--r-- | doc/texinfo.tex | 9913 |
1 files changed, 0 insertions, 9913 deletions
diff --git a/doc/texinfo.tex b/doc/texinfo.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 2abda0f3..00000000 --- a/doc/texinfo.tex +++ /dev/null | |||
@@ -1,9913 +0,0 @@ | |||
1 | % texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files. | ||
2 | % | ||
3 | % Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex. | ||
4 | \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi | ||
5 | % | ||
6 | \def\texinfoversion{2012-01-03.09} | ||
7 | % | ||
8 | % Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, | ||
9 | % 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, | ||
10 | % 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011 Free Software Foundation, Inc. | ||
11 | % | ||
12 | % This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or | ||
13 | % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as | ||
14 | % published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the | ||
15 | % License, or (at your option) any later version. | ||
16 | % | ||
17 | % This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be | ||
18 | % useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty | ||
19 | % of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU | ||
20 | % General Public License for more details. | ||
21 | % | ||
22 | % You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License | ||
23 | % along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. | ||
24 | % | ||
25 | % As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing | ||
26 | % a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without | ||
27 | % restriction. (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.) | ||
28 | % | ||
29 | % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug | ||
30 | % reports; you can get the latest version from: | ||
31 | % http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or | ||
32 | % ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex | ||
33 | % (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org). | ||
34 | % The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out | ||
35 | % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check. | ||
36 | % | ||
37 | % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a | ||
38 | % complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the | ||
39 | % problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated. | ||
40 | % | ||
41 | % To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the | ||
42 | % texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple | ||
43 | % manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this: | ||
44 | % tex foo.texi | ||
45 | % texindex foo.?? | ||
46 | % tex foo.texi | ||
47 | % tex foo.texi | ||
48 | % dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps. | ||
49 | % The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct. | ||
50 | % Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more | ||
51 | % than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary. | ||
52 | % | ||
53 | % It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some | ||
54 | % extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the | ||
55 | % full Texinfo distribution. | ||
56 | % | ||
57 | % The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo. | ||
58 | |||
59 | |||
60 | \message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:} | ||
61 | |||
62 | % If in a .fmt file, print the version number | ||
63 | % and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because | ||
64 | % they might have appeared in the input file name. | ||
65 | \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}% | ||
66 | \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active} | ||
67 | |||
68 | \chardef\other=12 | ||
69 | |||
70 | % We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo. | ||
71 | % For @tex, we can use \tabalign. | ||
72 | \let\+ = \relax | ||
73 | |||
74 | % Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine. | ||
75 | \let\ptexb=\b | ||
76 | \let\ptexbullet=\bullet | ||
77 | \let\ptexc=\c | ||
78 | \let\ptexcomma=\, | ||
79 | \let\ptexdot=\. | ||
80 | \let\ptexdots=\dots | ||
81 | \let\ptexend=\end | ||
82 | \let\ptexequiv=\equiv | ||
83 | \let\ptexexclam=\! | ||
84 | \let\ptexfootnote=\footnote | ||
85 | \let\ptexgtr=> | ||
86 | \let\ptexhat=^ | ||
87 | \let\ptexi=\i | ||
88 | \let\ptexindent=\indent | ||
89 | \let\ptexinsert=\insert | ||
90 | \let\ptexlbrace=\{ | ||
91 | \let\ptexless=< | ||
92 | \let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite | ||
93 | \let\ptexnoindent=\noindent | ||
94 | \let\ptexplus=+ | ||
95 | \let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright | ||
96 | \let\ptexrbrace=\} | ||
97 | \let\ptexslash=\/ | ||
98 | \let\ptexstar=\* | ||
99 | \let\ptext=\t | ||
100 | \let\ptextop=\top | ||
101 | {\catcode`\'=\active \global\let\ptexquoteright'}% active in plain's math mode | ||
102 | |||
103 | % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it | ||
104 | % starts a new line in the output. | ||
105 | \newlinechar = `^^J | ||
106 | |||
107 | % Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error | ||
108 | % messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. | ||
109 | % | ||
110 | \ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined | ||
111 | \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0. | ||
112 | \else | ||
113 | \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space} | ||
114 | \fi | ||
115 | |||
116 | % Set up fixed words for English if not already set. | ||
117 | \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi | ||
118 | \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi | ||
119 | \ifx\putworderror\undefined \gdef\putworderror{error}\fi | ||
120 | \ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi | ||
121 | \ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi | ||
122 | \ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi | ||
123 | \ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi | ||
124 | \ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi | ||
125 | \ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi | ||
126 | \ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi | ||
127 | \ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi | ||
128 | \ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi | ||
129 | \ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi | ||
130 | \ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi | ||
131 | \ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi | ||
132 | \ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi | ||
133 | \ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi | ||
134 | \ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi | ||
135 | \ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi | ||
136 | \ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi | ||
137 | % | ||
138 | \ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi | ||
139 | \ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi | ||
140 | \ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi | ||
141 | \ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi | ||
142 | \ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi | ||
143 | \ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi | ||
144 | \ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi | ||
145 | \ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi | ||
146 | \ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi | ||
147 | \ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi | ||
148 | \ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi | ||
149 | \ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi | ||
150 | % | ||
151 | \ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi | ||
152 | \ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi | ||
153 | \ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi | ||
154 | \ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi | ||
155 | \ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi | ||
156 | |||
157 | % Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful. | ||
158 | \chardef\spacecat = 10 | ||
159 | \def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat} | ||
160 | |||
161 | % sometimes characters are active, so we need control sequences. | ||
162 | \chardef\ampChar = `\& | ||
163 | \chardef\colonChar = `\: | ||
164 | \chardef\commaChar = `\, | ||
165 | \chardef\dashChar = `\- | ||
166 | \chardef\dotChar = `\. | ||
167 | \chardef\exclamChar= `\! | ||
168 | \chardef\hashChar = `\# | ||
169 | \chardef\lquoteChar= `\` | ||
170 | \chardef\questChar = `\? | ||
171 | \chardef\rquoteChar= `\' | ||
172 | \chardef\semiChar = `\; | ||
173 | \chardef\slashChar = `\/ | ||
174 | \chardef\underChar = `\_ | ||
175 | |||
176 | % Ignore a token. | ||
177 | % | ||
178 | \def\gobble#1{} | ||
179 | |||
180 | % The following is used inside several \edef's. | ||
181 | \def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname} | ||
182 | |||
183 | % Hyphenation fixes. | ||
184 | \hyphenation{ | ||
185 | Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script | ||
186 | ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps | ||
187 | data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script | ||
188 | man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm | ||
189 | par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces | ||
190 | spell-ing spell-ings | ||
191 | stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space | ||
192 | wide-spread wrap-around | ||
193 | } | ||
194 | |||
195 | % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. | ||
196 | \newdimen\bindingoffset | ||
197 | \newdimen\normaloffset | ||
198 | \newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight | ||
199 | |||
200 | % For a final copy, take out the rectangles | ||
201 | % that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided | ||
202 | % that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin). | ||
203 | % | ||
204 | \def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt } | ||
205 | |||
206 | % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file | ||
207 | % and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here, | ||
208 | % since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make | ||
209 | % some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log | ||
210 | % file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX. | ||
211 | % | ||
212 | \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% | ||
213 | \def\loggingall{% | ||
214 | \tracingstats2 | ||
215 | \tracingpages1 | ||
216 | \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex | ||
217 | \tracingparagraphs1 | ||
218 | \tracingoutput1 | ||
219 | \tracingmacros2 | ||
220 | \tracingrestores1 | ||
221 | \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen | ||
222 | \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined\else % etex gives us more logging | ||
223 | \tracingscantokens1 | ||
224 | \tracingifs1 | ||
225 | \tracinggroups1 | ||
226 | \tracingnesting2 | ||
227 | \tracingassigns1 | ||
228 | \fi | ||
229 | \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex | ||
230 | \errorcontextlines16 | ||
231 | }% | ||
232 | |||
233 | % @errormsg{MSG}. Do the index-like expansions on MSG, but if things | ||
234 | % aren't perfect, it's not the end of the world, being an error message, | ||
235 | % after all. | ||
236 | % | ||
237 | \def\errormsg{\begingroup \indexnofonts \doerrormsg} | ||
238 | \def\doerrormsg#1{\errmessage{#1}} | ||
239 | |||
240 | % add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing | ||
241 | % we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space. | ||
242 | % | ||
243 | \def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount | ||
244 | \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi} | ||
245 | \def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount | ||
246 | \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi} | ||
247 | \def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount | ||
248 | \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi} | ||
249 | |||
250 | % Do @cropmarks to get crop marks. | ||
251 | % | ||
252 | \newif\ifcropmarks | ||
253 | \let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue | ||
254 | % | ||
255 | % Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners. | ||
256 | % Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986 | ||
257 | % | ||
258 | \newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines | ||
259 | \newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc | ||
260 | \newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt | ||
261 | \newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in | ||
262 | |||
263 | % Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor. | ||
264 | % We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark. | ||
265 | % This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark. | ||
266 | % | ||
267 | % A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct. | ||
268 | % \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase. | ||
269 | % | ||
270 | % Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter | ||
271 | % (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top | ||
272 | % of a page, or that at the bottom of a page. The solution is | ||
273 | % described on page 260 of The TeXbook. It involves outputting two | ||
274 | % marks for the sectioning macros, one before the section break, and | ||
275 | % one after. I won't pretend I can describe this better than DEK... | ||
276 | \def\domark{% | ||
277 | \toks0=\expandafter{\lastchapterdefs}% | ||
278 | \toks2=\expandafter{\lastsectiondefs}% | ||
279 | \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}% | ||
280 | \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}% | ||
281 | \toks8=\expandafter{\lastcolordefs}% | ||
282 | \mark{% | ||
283 | \the\toks0 \the\toks2 | ||
284 | \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6 | ||
285 | \noexpand\else \the\toks8 | ||
286 | }% | ||
287 | } | ||
288 | % \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title | ||
289 | % page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us | ||
290 | % the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g., | ||
291 | % @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very | ||
292 | % first @chapter. | ||
293 | \def\gettopheadingmarks{% | ||
294 | \ifcase0\topmark\fi | ||
295 | \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi | ||
296 | } | ||
297 | \def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi} | ||
298 | \def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\topmark\fi} | ||
299 | |||
300 | % Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors. | ||
301 | \def\lastchapterdefs{} | ||
302 | \def\lastsectiondefs{} | ||
303 | \def\prevchapterdefs{} | ||
304 | \def\prevsectiondefs{} | ||
305 | \def\lastcolordefs{} | ||
306 | |||
307 | % Main output routine. | ||
308 | \chardef\PAGE = 255 | ||
309 | \output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} | ||
310 | |||
311 | \newbox\headlinebox | ||
312 | \newbox\footlinebox | ||
313 | |||
314 | % \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents | ||
315 | % does insertions, but you have to call it yourself. | ||
316 | \def\onepageout#1{% | ||
317 | \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi | ||
318 | % | ||
319 | \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset | ||
320 | \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi | ||
321 | % | ||
322 | % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in | ||
323 | % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code). | ||
324 | \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi | ||
325 | \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}% | ||
326 | \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi | ||
327 | \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}% | ||
328 | % | ||
329 | {% | ||
330 | % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to | ||
331 | % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends | ||
332 | % before the \shipout runs. | ||
333 | % | ||
334 | \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output. | ||
335 | \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if | ||
336 | % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example. | ||
337 | % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this: | ||
338 | % \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}} | ||
339 | % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in; | ||
340 | % it needs to be | ||
341 | % {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym} | ||
342 | \shipout\vbox{% | ||
343 | % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page. | ||
344 | \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi | ||
345 | % | ||
346 | \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup | ||
347 | \hsize = \outerhsize | ||
348 | \vskip-\topandbottommargin | ||
349 | \vtop to0pt{% | ||
350 | \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}% | ||
351 | \nointerlineskip | ||
352 | \line{% | ||
353 | \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}% | ||
354 | \hfill | ||
355 | \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}% | ||
356 | }% | ||
357 | \vss}% | ||
358 | \vskip\topandbottommargin | ||
359 | \line\bgroup | ||
360 | \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize. | ||
361 | \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi | ||
362 | \vbox\bgroup | ||
363 | \fi | ||
364 | % | ||
365 | \unvbox\headlinebox | ||
366 | \pagebody{#1}% | ||
367 | \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt | ||
368 | % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty. | ||
369 | % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.) | ||
370 | % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect. | ||
371 | \vskip 24pt | ||
372 | \unvbox\footlinebox | ||
373 | \fi | ||
374 | % | ||
375 | \ifcropmarks | ||
376 | \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup | ||
377 | \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup | ||
378 | \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill | ||
379 | \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick | ||
380 | \vbox to0pt{\vss | ||
381 | \line{% | ||
382 | \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}% | ||
383 | \hfill | ||
384 | \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}% | ||
385 | }% | ||
386 | \nointerlineskip | ||
387 | \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}% | ||
388 | }% | ||
389 | \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause | ||
390 | \fi | ||
391 | }% end of \shipout\vbox | ||
392 | }% end of group with \indexdummies | ||
393 | \advancepageno | ||
394 | \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi | ||
395 | } | ||
396 | |||
397 | \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen | ||
398 | |||
399 | \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} | ||
400 | {\catcode`\@ =11 | ||
401 | \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi | ||
402 | % marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala) | ||
403 | \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present | ||
404 | \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi | ||
405 | \dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax | ||
406 | \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi | ||
407 | \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} | ||
408 | } | ||
409 | |||
410 | % Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are | ||
411 | % offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize | ||
412 | % (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986) | ||
413 | % | ||
414 | \def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong} | ||
415 | \def\nstop{\vbox | ||
416 | {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}} | ||
417 | \def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong} | ||
418 | \def\nsbot{\vbox | ||
419 | {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}} | ||
420 | |||
421 | % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of | ||
422 | % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a | ||
423 | % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument. | ||
424 | % | ||
425 | \def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}} | ||
426 | \def\parseargusing#1#2{% | ||
427 | \def\argtorun{#2}% | ||
428 | \begingroup | ||
429 | \obeylines | ||
430 | \spaceisspace | ||
431 | #1% | ||
432 | \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below. | ||
433 | } | ||
434 | |||
435 | {\obeylines % | ||
436 | \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{% | ||
437 | \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg. | ||
438 | \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm% | ||
439 | }% | ||
440 | } | ||
441 | |||
442 | % First remove any @comment, then any @c comment. | ||
443 | \def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm} | ||
444 | \def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm} | ||
445 | |||
446 | % Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space. | ||
447 | % | ||
448 | % \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g., | ||
449 | % @end itemize @c foo | ||
450 | % This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed | ||
451 | % by \finishparsearg. | ||
452 | % | ||
453 | \def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M} | ||
454 | \def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M} | ||
455 | \def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{% | ||
456 | \def\temp{#3}% | ||
457 | \ifx\temp\empty | ||
458 | % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp: | ||
459 | \let\temp\finishparsearg | ||
460 | \else | ||
461 | \let\temp\argcheckspaces | ||
462 | \fi | ||
463 | % Put the space token in: | ||
464 | \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm | ||
465 | } | ||
466 | |||
467 | % If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so | ||
468 | % to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation. | ||
469 | % We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now, | ||
470 | % just before passing the control to \argtorun. | ||
471 | % (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is | ||
472 | % either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger | ||
473 | % that a pair of braces would be stripped. | ||
474 | % | ||
475 | % But first, we have to remove the trailing space token. | ||
476 | % | ||
477 | \def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}} | ||
478 | |||
479 | % \parseargdef\foo{...} | ||
480 | % is roughly equivalent to | ||
481 | % \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo} | ||
482 | % \def\Xfoo#1{...} | ||
483 | % | ||
484 | % Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my | ||
485 | % favourite TeX trick. --kasal, 16nov03 | ||
486 | |||
487 | \def\parseargdef#1{% | ||
488 | \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1% | ||
489 | } | ||
490 | \def\doparseargdef#1#2{% | ||
491 | \def#2{\parsearg#1}% | ||
492 | \def#1##1% | ||
493 | } | ||
494 | |||
495 | % Several utility definitions with active space: | ||
496 | { | ||
497 | \obeyspaces | ||
498 | \gdef\obeyedspace{ } | ||
499 | |||
500 | % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword | ||
501 | % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this | ||
502 | % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input | ||
503 | % should produce a line of output anyway. | ||
504 | % | ||
505 | \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie} | ||
506 | |||
507 | % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces | ||
508 | % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the | ||
509 | % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ). | ||
510 | \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space} | ||
511 | } | ||
512 | |||
513 | |||
514 | \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next} | ||
515 | |||
516 | % Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this: | ||
517 | % | ||
518 | % \envdef\foo{...} | ||
519 | % \def\Efoo{...} | ||
520 | % | ||
521 | % It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the | ||
522 | % actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also | ||
523 | % defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks | ||
524 | % whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be | ||
525 | % used to check whether the current environment is the one expected. | ||
526 | % | ||
527 | % Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they | ||
528 | % are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The | ||
529 | % implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this | ||
530 | % special case.) | ||
531 | |||
532 | |||
533 | % At run-time, environments start with this: | ||
534 | \def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}} | ||
535 | % initialize | ||
536 | \let\thisenv\empty | ||
537 | |||
538 | % ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'': | ||
539 | \long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} | ||
540 | \def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} | ||
541 | |||
542 | % Check whether we're in the right environment: | ||
543 | \def\checkenv#1{% | ||
544 | \def\temp{#1}% | ||
545 | \ifx\thisenv\temp | ||
546 | \else | ||
547 | \badenverr | ||
548 | \fi | ||
549 | } | ||
550 | |||
551 | % Environment mismatch, #1 expected: | ||
552 | \def\badenverr{% | ||
553 | \errhelp = \EMsimple | ||
554 | \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp, | ||
555 | not \inenvironment\thisenv}% | ||
556 | } | ||
557 | \def\inenvironment#1{% | ||
558 | \ifx#1\empty | ||
559 | outside of any environment% | ||
560 | \else | ||
561 | in environment \expandafter\string#1% | ||
562 | \fi | ||
563 | } | ||
564 | |||
565 | % @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo. | ||
566 | % But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv | ||
567 | % | ||
568 | \parseargdef\end{% | ||
569 | \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname | ||
570 | \else | ||
571 | % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal. | ||
572 | \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname | ||
573 | \csname E#1\endcsname | ||
574 | \endgroup | ||
575 | \fi | ||
576 | } | ||
577 | |||
578 | \newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.} | ||
579 | |||
580 | |||
581 | % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space | ||
582 | % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space | ||
583 | % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and | ||
584 | % since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the | ||
585 | % penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph. | ||
586 | {\catcode`@ = 11 | ||
587 | % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble | ||
588 | % if the definition is written into an index file. | ||
589 | \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M | ||
590 | \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ } | ||
591 | } | ||
592 | |||
593 | % @: forces normal size whitespace following. | ||
594 | \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } | ||
595 | |||
596 | % @* forces a line break. | ||
597 | \def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces} | ||
598 | |||
599 | % @/ allows a line break. | ||
600 | \let\/=\allowbreak | ||
601 | |||
602 | % @. is an end-of-sentence period. | ||
603 | \def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} | ||
604 | |||
605 | % @! is an end-of-sentence bang. | ||
606 | \def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} | ||
607 | |||
608 | % @? is an end-of-sentence query. | ||
609 | \def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} | ||
610 | |||
611 | % @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation. | ||
612 | % | ||
613 | \def\onword{on} | ||
614 | \def\offword{off} | ||
615 | % | ||
616 | \parseargdef\frenchspacing{% | ||
617 | \def\temp{#1}% | ||
618 | \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing | ||
619 | \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing | ||
620 | \else | ||
621 | \errhelp = \EMsimple | ||
622 | \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on|off}% | ||
623 | \fi\fi | ||
624 | } | ||
625 | |||
626 | % @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the | ||
627 | % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would | ||
628 | % produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph. | ||
629 | \def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}} | ||
630 | |||
631 | % @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing | ||
632 | % it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box | ||
633 | % to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for | ||
634 | % \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is | ||
635 | % max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large, | ||
636 | % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and | ||
637 | % the text is small, which looks bad. | ||
638 | % | ||
639 | % Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can | ||
640 | % cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it | ||
641 | % does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an | ||
642 | % explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The | ||
643 | % threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit | ||
644 | % percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex). | ||
645 | % | ||
646 | \newbox\groupbox | ||
647 | \def\vfilllimit{0.7} | ||
648 | % | ||
649 | \envdef\group{% | ||
650 | \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else | ||
651 | \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp | ||
652 | \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}% | ||
653 | \fi | ||
654 | \startsavinginserts | ||
655 | % | ||
656 | \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup | ||
657 | % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as | ||
658 | % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an | ||
659 | % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after | ||
660 | % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group | ||
661 | % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo | ||
662 | % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text. | ||
663 | \comment | ||
664 | } | ||
665 | % | ||
666 | % The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts | ||
667 | % \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done) | ||
668 | % \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space | ||
669 | % above. But it's pretty close. | ||
670 | \def\Egroup{% | ||
671 | % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group | ||
672 | % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth. | ||
673 | \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar. | ||
674 | \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth | ||
675 | \egroup % End the \vtop. | ||
676 | % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box. | ||
677 | \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox | ||
678 | % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less). | ||
679 | \dimen2 = \pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal | ||
680 | % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big | ||
681 | % group, force a page break. | ||
682 | \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2 | ||
683 | \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight | ||
684 | \page | ||
685 | \fi | ||
686 | \fi | ||
687 | \box\groupbox | ||
688 | \prevdepth = \dimen1 | ||
689 | \checkinserts | ||
690 | } | ||
691 | % | ||
692 | % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help | ||
693 | % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'. | ||
694 | % | ||
695 | \newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{% | ||
696 | group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J% | ||
697 | where each line of input produces a line of output.} | ||
698 | |||
699 | % @need space-in-mils | ||
700 | % forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining. | ||
701 | |||
702 | \newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in | ||
703 | |||
704 | \parseargdef\need{% | ||
705 | % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a | ||
706 | % paragraph. | ||
707 | \par | ||
708 | % | ||
709 | % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless. | ||
710 | \dimen0 = #1\mil | ||
711 | \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox | ||
712 | \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox | ||
713 | \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2 | ||
714 | % | ||
715 | % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the | ||
716 | % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line. | ||
717 | % And a page break here is fine. | ||
718 | \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}% | ||
719 | % | ||
720 | % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the | ||
721 | % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the | ||
722 | % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider | ||
723 | % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the | ||
724 | % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999. | ||
725 | % | ||
726 | % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the | ||
727 | % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in | ||
728 | % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which | ||
729 | % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing | ||
730 | % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an | ||
731 | % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real | ||
732 | % document, then we can reconsider our strategy. | ||
733 | \penalty9999 | ||
734 | % | ||
735 | % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not. | ||
736 | \kern -#1\mil | ||
737 | % | ||
738 | % Do not allow a page break right after this kern. | ||
739 | \nobreak | ||
740 | \fi | ||
741 | } | ||
742 | |||
743 | % @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented). | ||
744 | |||
745 | \let\br = \par | ||
746 | |||
747 | % @page forces the start of a new page. | ||
748 | % | ||
749 | \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} | ||
750 | |||
751 | % @exdent text.... | ||
752 | % outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin | ||
753 | |||
754 | % This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment. | ||
755 | % That's how much \exdent should take out. | ||
756 | \newskip\exdentamount | ||
757 | |||
758 | % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun. | ||
759 | \parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break} | ||
760 | |||
761 | % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example. | ||
762 | \parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount | ||
763 | \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} | ||
764 | |||
765 | % @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current | ||
766 | % paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion | ||
767 | % class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. Not documented, written for gawk manual. | ||
768 | % | ||
769 | \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm | ||
770 | \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox} | ||
771 | % | ||
772 | \def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{% | ||
773 | \nobreak | ||
774 | \kern-\strutdepth | ||
775 | \vtop to \strutdepth{% | ||
776 | \baselineskip=\strutdepth | ||
777 | \vss | ||
778 | % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to | ||
779 | % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size. | ||
780 | \ifx#1l% | ||
781 | \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}% | ||
782 | \else | ||
783 | \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}% | ||
784 | \fi | ||
785 | \null | ||
786 | }% | ||
787 | }} | ||
788 | \def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l} | ||
789 | \def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r} | ||
790 | % | ||
791 | % @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]} | ||
792 | % (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right; | ||
793 | % else use TEXT for both). | ||
794 | % | ||
795 | \def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish} | ||
796 | \def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing. | ||
797 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% | ||
798 | \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt | ||
799 | \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts | ||
800 | \def\righttext{#2}% | ||
801 | \else | ||
802 | \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text | ||
803 | \def\righttext{#1}% | ||
804 | \fi | ||
805 | % | ||
806 | \ifodd\pageno | ||
807 | \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin | ||
808 | \else | ||
809 | \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}% | ||
810 | \fi | ||
811 | \temp | ||
812 | } | ||
813 | |||
814 | % @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should | ||
815 | % surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the | ||
816 | % change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would | ||
817 | % have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main | ||
818 | % vertical list for the beginning and end of each change). This command | ||
819 | % is not documented, not supported, and doesn't work. | ||
820 | % | ||
821 | \def\|{% | ||
822 | % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode. | ||
823 | \leavevmode | ||
824 | % | ||
825 | % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output. | ||
826 | \vadjust{% | ||
827 | % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current | ||
828 | % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record. | ||
829 | \vskip-\baselineskip | ||
830 | % | ||
831 | % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So | ||
832 | % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin. | ||
833 | \llap{% | ||
834 | % | ||
835 | % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'. | ||
836 | \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt | ||
837 | % | ||
838 | % This is the space between the bar and the text. | ||
839 | \hskip 12pt | ||
840 | }% | ||
841 | }% | ||
842 | } | ||
843 | |||
844 | % @include FILE -- \input text of FILE. | ||
845 | % | ||
846 | \def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz} | ||
847 | \def\includezzz#1{% | ||
848 | \pushthisfilestack | ||
849 | \def\thisfile{#1}% | ||
850 | {% | ||
851 | \makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE. | ||
852 | \turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion | ||
853 | \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. | ||
854 | \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @include of #1^^J}% | ||
855 | \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }% | ||
856 | % | ||
857 | % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes | ||
858 | % definitions, etc. | ||
859 | \expandafter | ||
860 | }\temp | ||
861 | \popthisfilestack | ||
862 | } | ||
863 | \def\filenamecatcodes{% | ||
864 | \catcode`\\=\other | ||
865 | \catcode`~=\other | ||
866 | \catcode`^=\other | ||
867 | \catcode`_=\other | ||
868 | \catcode`|=\other | ||
869 | \catcode`<=\other | ||
870 | \catcode`>=\other | ||
871 | \catcode`+=\other | ||
872 | \catcode`-=\other | ||
873 | \catcode`\`=\other | ||
874 | \catcode`\'=\other | ||
875 | } | ||
876 | |||
877 | \def\pushthisfilestack{% | ||
878 | \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm | ||
879 | } | ||
880 | \def\pushthisfilestackX{% | ||
881 | \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm | ||
882 | } | ||
883 | \def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {% | ||
884 | \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}% | ||
885 | } | ||
886 | |||
887 | \def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty} | ||
888 | \def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error: | ||
889 | the stack of filenames is empty.}} | ||
890 | |||
891 | \def\thisfile{} | ||
892 | |||
893 | % @center line | ||
894 | % outputs that line, centered. | ||
895 | % | ||
896 | \parseargdef\center{% | ||
897 | \ifhmode | ||
898 | \let\next\centerH | ||
899 | \else | ||
900 | \let\next\centerV | ||
901 | \fi | ||
902 | \next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}% | ||
903 | } | ||
904 | \def\centerH#1{% | ||
905 | {% | ||
906 | \hfil\break | ||
907 | \advance\hsize by -\leftskip | ||
908 | \advance\hsize by -\rightskip | ||
909 | \line{#1}% | ||
910 | \break | ||
911 | }% | ||
912 | } | ||
913 | \def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}} | ||
914 | |||
915 | % @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space | ||
916 | |||
917 | \parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip} | ||
918 | |||
919 | % @comment ...line which is ignored... | ||
920 | % @c is the same as @comment | ||
921 | % @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment | ||
922 | |||
923 | \def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other% | ||
924 | \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other% | ||
925 | \commentxxx} | ||
926 | {\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}} | ||
927 | |||
928 | \let\c=\comment | ||
929 | |||
930 | % @paragraphindent NCHARS | ||
931 | % We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough. | ||
932 | % NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'. | ||
933 | % We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though. | ||
934 | % | ||
935 | \def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords | ||
936 | \def\noneword{none} | ||
937 | % | ||
938 | \parseargdef\paragraphindent{% | ||
939 | \def\temp{#1}% | ||
940 | \ifx\temp\asisword | ||
941 | \else | ||
942 | \ifx\temp\noneword | ||
943 | \defaultparindent = 0pt | ||
944 | \else | ||
945 | \defaultparindent = #1em | ||
946 | \fi | ||
947 | \fi | ||
948 | \parindent = \defaultparindent | ||
949 | } | ||
950 | |||
951 | % @exampleindent NCHARS | ||
952 | % We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent. | ||
953 | % It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but | ||
954 | % I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent. | ||
955 | \parseargdef\exampleindent{% | ||
956 | \def\temp{#1}% | ||
957 | \ifx\temp\asisword | ||
958 | \else | ||
959 | \ifx\temp\noneword | ||
960 | \lispnarrowing = 0pt | ||
961 | \else | ||
962 | \lispnarrowing = #1em | ||
963 | \fi | ||
964 | \fi | ||
965 | } | ||
966 | |||
967 | % @firstparagraphindent WORD | ||
968 | % If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph | ||
969 | % after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such | ||
970 | % paragraphs. | ||
971 | % | ||
972 | % The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling | ||
973 | % \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do. | ||
974 | % We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD. | ||
975 | % By default, we suppress indentation. | ||
976 | % | ||
977 | \def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent} | ||
978 | \def\insertword{insert} | ||
979 | % | ||
980 | \parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{% | ||
981 | \def\temp{#1}% | ||
982 | \ifx\temp\noneword | ||
983 | \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent | ||
984 | \else\ifx\temp\insertword | ||
985 | \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax | ||
986 | \else | ||
987 | \errhelp = \EMsimple | ||
988 | \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}% | ||
989 | \fi\fi | ||
990 | } | ||
991 | |||
992 | % Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to | ||
993 | % \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty. | ||
994 | % | ||
995 | % We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next | ||
996 | % paragraph. | ||
997 | % | ||
998 | \gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{% | ||
999 | \gdef\indent{% | ||
1000 | \restorefirstparagraphindent | ||
1001 | \indent | ||
1002 | }% | ||
1003 | \gdef\noindent{% | ||
1004 | \restorefirstparagraphindent | ||
1005 | \noindent | ||
1006 | }% | ||
1007 | \global\everypar = {% | ||
1008 | \kern -\parindent | ||
1009 | \restorefirstparagraphindent | ||
1010 | }% | ||
1011 | } | ||
1012 | |||
1013 | \gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{% | ||
1014 | \global \let \indent = \ptexindent | ||
1015 | \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent | ||
1016 | \global \everypar = {}% | ||
1017 | } | ||
1018 | |||
1019 | |||
1020 | % @refill is a no-op. | ||
1021 | \let\refill=\relax | ||
1022 | |||
1023 | % If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to | ||
1024 | % be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs. | ||
1025 | % This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename). | ||
1026 | % | ||
1027 | \newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files. | ||
1028 | \let\novalidate = \linksfalse | ||
1029 | |||
1030 | % @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file. | ||
1031 | % So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input. | ||
1032 | % This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo. | ||
1033 | \def\setfilename{% | ||
1034 | \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'. | ||
1035 | \iflinks | ||
1036 | \tryauxfile | ||
1037 | % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit. | ||
1038 | \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux | ||
1039 | \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case. | ||
1040 | \openindices | ||
1041 | \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds. | ||
1042 | % | ||
1043 | % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it. | ||
1044 | % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc. | ||
1045 | \openin 1 texinfo.cnf | ||
1046 | \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi | ||
1047 | \closein 1 | ||
1048 | % | ||
1049 | \comment % Ignore the actual filename. | ||
1050 | } | ||
1051 | |||
1052 | % Called from \setfilename. | ||
1053 | % | ||
1054 | \def\openindices{% | ||
1055 | \newindex{cp}% | ||
1056 | \newcodeindex{fn}% | ||
1057 | \newcodeindex{vr}% | ||
1058 | \newcodeindex{tp}% | ||
1059 | \newcodeindex{ky}% | ||
1060 | \newcodeindex{pg}% | ||
1061 | } | ||
1062 | |||
1063 | % @bye. | ||
1064 | \outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend} | ||
1065 | |||
1066 | |||
1067 | \message{pdf,} | ||
1068 | % adobe `portable' document format | ||
1069 | \newcount\tempnum | ||
1070 | \newcount\lnkcount | ||
1071 | \newtoks\filename | ||
1072 | \newcount\filenamelength | ||
1073 | \newcount\pgn | ||
1074 | \newtoks\toksA | ||
1075 | \newtoks\toksB | ||
1076 | \newtoks\toksC | ||
1077 | \newtoks\toksD | ||
1078 | \newbox\boxA | ||
1079 | \newcount\countA | ||
1080 | \newif\ifpdf | ||
1081 | \newif\ifpdfmakepagedest | ||
1082 | |||
1083 | % when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1 | ||
1084 | % can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as being undefined. | ||
1085 | \ifx\pdfoutput\thisisundefined | ||
1086 | \else | ||
1087 | \ifx\pdfoutput\relax | ||
1088 | \else | ||
1089 | \ifcase\pdfoutput | ||
1090 | \else | ||
1091 | \pdftrue | ||
1092 | \fi | ||
1093 | \fi | ||
1094 | \fi | ||
1095 | |||
1096 | % PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets, | ||
1097 | % for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to | ||
1098 | % double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be | ||
1099 | % interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good. | ||
1100 | % | ||
1101 | % See http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html and | ||
1102 | % related messages. The final outcome is that it is up to the TeX user | ||
1103 | % to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so | ||
1104 | % that's what we do. pdftex 1.30.0 (ca.2005) introduced a primitive to | ||
1105 | % do this reliably, so we use it. | ||
1106 | |||
1107 | % #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements, | ||
1108 | % which we \xdef. | ||
1109 | \def\txiescapepdf#1{% | ||
1110 | \ifx\pdfescapestring\relax | ||
1111 | % No primitive available; should we give a warning or log? | ||
1112 | % Many times it won't matter. | ||
1113 | \else | ||
1114 | % The expandable \pdfescapestring primitive escapes parentheses, | ||
1115 | % backslashes, and other special chars. | ||
1116 | \xdef#1{\pdfescapestring{#1}}% | ||
1117 | \fi | ||
1118 | } | ||
1119 | |||
1120 | \newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images | ||
1121 | with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot | ||
1122 | be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI | ||
1123 | output) for that.)} | ||
1124 | |||
1125 | \ifpdf | ||
1126 | % | ||
1127 | % Color manipulation macros based on pdfcolor.tex, | ||
1128 | % except using rgb instead of cmyk; the latter is said to render as a | ||
1129 | % very dark gray on-screen and a very dark halftone in print, instead | ||
1130 | % of actual black. | ||
1131 | \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12} | ||
1132 | \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0} | ||
1133 | % | ||
1134 | % k sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.); | ||
1135 | % K sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s). | ||
1136 | \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 rg #1 RG}} | ||
1137 | % | ||
1138 | % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly, | ||
1139 | % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore. | ||
1140 | \def\setcolor#1{% | ||
1141 | \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}% | ||
1142 | \domark | ||
1143 | \pdfsetcolor{#1}% | ||
1144 | } | ||
1145 | % | ||
1146 | \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack} | ||
1147 | \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor} | ||
1148 | \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor} | ||
1149 | \def\lastcolordefs{} | ||
1150 | % | ||
1151 | \def\makefootline{% | ||
1152 | \baselineskip24pt | ||
1153 | \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}% | ||
1154 | } | ||
1155 | % | ||
1156 | \def\makeheadline{% | ||
1157 | \vbox to 0pt{% | ||
1158 | \vskip-22.5pt | ||
1159 | \line{% | ||
1160 | \vbox to8.5pt{}% | ||
1161 | % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks. | ||
1162 | \getcolormarks | ||
1163 | % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color. | ||
1164 | \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}% | ||
1165 | }% | ||
1166 | \vss | ||
1167 | }% | ||
1168 | \nointerlineskip | ||
1169 | } | ||
1170 | % | ||
1171 | % | ||
1172 | \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines} | ||
1173 | % | ||
1174 | % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto). | ||
1175 | \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{% | ||
1176 | \def\imagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% | ||
1177 | \def\imageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% | ||
1178 | % | ||
1179 | % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .pdf, .png, .jpg (among | ||
1180 | % others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if | ||
1181 | % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a | ||
1182 | % bitmap. | ||
1183 | \let\pdfimgext=\empty | ||
1184 | \begingroup | ||
1185 | \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1 | ||
1186 | \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1 | ||
1187 | \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1 | ||
1188 | \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1 | ||
1189 | \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1 | ||
1190 | \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1 | ||
1191 | \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp | ||
1192 | \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}% | ||
1193 | \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}% | ||
1194 | \fi | ||
1195 | \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}% | ||
1196 | \fi | ||
1197 | \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}% | ||
1198 | \fi | ||
1199 | \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}% | ||
1200 | \fi | ||
1201 | \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}% | ||
1202 | \fi | ||
1203 | \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}% | ||
1204 | \fi | ||
1205 | \closein 1 | ||
1206 | \endgroup | ||
1207 | % | ||
1208 | % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is | ||
1209 | % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.) | ||
1210 | \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 | ||
1211 | \immediate\pdfimage | ||
1212 | \else | ||
1213 | \immediate\pdfximage | ||
1214 | \fi | ||
1215 | \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \imagewidth \fi | ||
1216 | \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \imageheight \fi | ||
1217 | \ifnum\pdftexversion<13 | ||
1218 | #1.\pdfimgext | ||
1219 | \else | ||
1220 | {#1.\pdfimgext}% | ||
1221 | \fi | ||
1222 | \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else | ||
1223 | \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage | ||
1224 | \fi} | ||
1225 | % | ||
1226 | \def\pdfmkdest#1{{% | ||
1227 | % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters | ||
1228 | % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title. | ||
1229 | \indexnofonts | ||
1230 | \turnoffactive | ||
1231 | \makevalueexpandable | ||
1232 | \def\pdfdestname{#1}% | ||
1233 | \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname | ||
1234 | \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}% | ||
1235 | }} | ||
1236 | % | ||
1237 | % used to mark target names; must be expandable. | ||
1238 | \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1} | ||
1239 | % | ||
1240 | % by default, use a color that is dark enough to print on paper as | ||
1241 | % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing. | ||
1242 | \def\urlcolor{\rgbDarkRed} | ||
1243 | \def\linkcolor{\rgbDarkRed} | ||
1244 | \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink} | ||
1245 | % | ||
1246 | % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines | ||
1247 | % come from Petr Olsak | ||
1248 | \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0% | ||
1249 | \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi} | ||
1250 | \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax | ||
1251 | \advance\tempnum by 1 | ||
1252 | \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}} | ||
1253 | % | ||
1254 | % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the | ||
1255 | % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number | ||
1256 | % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text, | ||
1257 | % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node. | ||
1258 | % #4 is the page number | ||
1259 | % | ||
1260 | \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% | ||
1261 | % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the | ||
1262 | % page number. We could generate a destination for the section | ||
1263 | % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't | ||
1264 | % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured. | ||
1265 | \edef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}% | ||
1266 | \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty | ||
1267 | \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}% | ||
1268 | \else | ||
1269 | \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinedest | ||
1270 | \fi | ||
1271 | % | ||
1272 | % Also escape PDF chars in the display string. | ||
1273 | \edef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% | ||
1274 | \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinetext | ||
1275 | % | ||
1276 | \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}% | ||
1277 | } | ||
1278 | % | ||
1279 | \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% | ||
1280 | \begingroup | ||
1281 | % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline. | ||
1282 | \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines | ||
1283 | \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% | ||
1284 | \def\thischapnum{##2}% | ||
1285 | \def\thissecnum{0}% | ||
1286 | \def\thissubsecnum{0}% | ||
1287 | }% | ||
1288 | \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% | ||
1289 | \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}% | ||
1290 | \def\thissecnum{##2}% | ||
1291 | \def\thissubsecnum{0}% | ||
1292 | }% | ||
1293 | \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% | ||
1294 | \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}% | ||
1295 | \def\thissubsecnum{##2}% | ||
1296 | }% | ||
1297 | \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% | ||
1298 | \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}% | ||
1299 | }% | ||
1300 | \def\thischapnum{0}% | ||
1301 | \def\thissecnum{0}% | ||
1302 | \def\thissubsecnum{0}% | ||
1303 | % | ||
1304 | % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et | ||
1305 | % al. a second time, below. | ||
1306 | \def\appentry{\numchapentry}% | ||
1307 | \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}% | ||
1308 | \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% | ||
1309 | \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% | ||
1310 | \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}% | ||
1311 | \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}% | ||
1312 | \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% | ||
1313 | \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% | ||
1314 | \readdatafile{toc}% | ||
1315 | % | ||
1316 | % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines. | ||
1317 | % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of | ||
1318 | % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above. | ||
1319 | % | ||
1320 | % We use the node names as the destinations. | ||
1321 | \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% | ||
1322 | \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}% | ||
1323 | \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% | ||
1324 | \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% | ||
1325 | \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% | ||
1326 | \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% | ||
1327 | \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero | ||
1328 | \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}% | ||
1329 | % | ||
1330 | % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of | ||
1331 | % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters, | ||
1332 | % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from | ||
1333 | % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from | ||
1334 | % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100. | ||
1335 | % | ||
1336 | % TODO this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to | ||
1337 | % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Too | ||
1338 | % much work for too little return. Just use the ASCII equivalents | ||
1339 | % we use for the index sort strings. | ||
1340 | % | ||
1341 | \indexnofonts | ||
1342 | \setupdatafile | ||
1343 | % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike | ||
1344 | % Texinfo index files. So set that up. | ||
1345 | \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}% | ||
1346 | \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}% | ||
1347 | \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash | ||
1348 | \input \tocreadfilename | ||
1349 | \endgroup | ||
1350 | } | ||
1351 | {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2 | ||
1352 | \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other | ||
1353 | \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]% | ||
1354 | \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]% | ||
1355 | ] | ||
1356 | % | ||
1357 | \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% | ||
1358 | \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax | ||
1359 | \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces | ||
1360 | \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% | ||
1361 | \advance\filenamelength by 1 | ||
1362 | \fi | ||
1363 | \fi | ||
1364 | \nextsp} | ||
1365 | \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax} | ||
1366 | \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 | ||
1367 | \let \startlink \pdfannotlink | ||
1368 | \else | ||
1369 | \let \startlink \pdfstartlink | ||
1370 | \fi | ||
1371 | % make a live url in pdf output. | ||
1372 | \def\pdfurl#1{% | ||
1373 | \begingroup | ||
1374 | % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not | ||
1375 | % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context | ||
1376 | % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one | ||
1377 | % people have actually reported a problem with. | ||
1378 | % | ||
1379 | \normalturnoffactive | ||
1380 | \def\@{@}% | ||
1381 | \let\/=\empty | ||
1382 | \makevalueexpandable | ||
1383 | % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just | ||
1384 | % special-casing \var here? | ||
1385 | \def\var##1{##1}% | ||
1386 | % | ||
1387 | \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}% | ||
1388 | \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% | ||
1389 | user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}% | ||
1390 | \endgroup} | ||
1391 | \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} | ||
1392 | \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} | ||
1393 | \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} | ||
1394 | \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} | ||
1395 | \def\maketoks{% | ||
1396 | \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax | ||
1397 | \ifx\first0\adn0 | ||
1398 | \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 | ||
1399 | \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 | ||
1400 | \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 | ||
1401 | \else | ||
1402 | \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi | ||
1403 | \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else | ||
1404 | \let\next=\maketoks | ||
1405 | \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} | ||
1406 | \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi | ||
1407 | \fi | ||
1408 | \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi | ||
1409 | \next} | ||
1410 | \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% | ||
1411 | {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} | ||
1412 | \def\pdflink#1{% | ||
1413 | \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}} | ||
1414 | \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink} | ||
1415 | \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} | ||
1416 | \else | ||
1417 | % non-pdf mode | ||
1418 | \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble | ||
1419 | \let\pdfurl = \gobble | ||
1420 | \let\endlink = \relax | ||
1421 | \let\setcolor = \gobble | ||
1422 | \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble | ||
1423 | \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax | ||
1424 | \fi % \ifx\pdfoutput | ||
1425 | |||
1426 | |||
1427 | \message{fonts,} | ||
1428 | |||
1429 | % Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle. | ||
1430 | % For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in | ||
1431 | % italics, not bold italics. | ||
1432 | % | ||
1433 | \def\setfontstyle#1{% | ||
1434 | \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd. | ||
1435 | \csname ten#1\endcsname % change the current font | ||
1436 | } | ||
1437 | |||
1438 | % Select #1 fonts with the current style. | ||
1439 | % | ||
1440 | \def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname} | ||
1441 | |||
1442 | \def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}} | ||
1443 | \def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}} | ||
1444 | \def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}} | ||
1445 | \def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf} | ||
1446 | \def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}} | ||
1447 | |||
1448 | % Unfortunately, we have to override this for titles and the like, since | ||
1449 | % in those cases "rm" is bold. Sigh. | ||
1450 | \def\rmisbold{\rm\def\curfontstyle{bf}} | ||
1451 | |||
1452 | % Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. | ||
1453 | % So we set up a \sf. | ||
1454 | \newfam\sffam | ||
1455 | \def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}} | ||
1456 | \let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf. | ||
1457 | |||
1458 | % We don't need math for this font style. | ||
1459 | \def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}} | ||
1460 | |||
1461 | |||
1462 | % Default leading. | ||
1463 | \newdimen\textleading \textleading = 13.2pt | ||
1464 | |||
1465 | % Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size | ||
1466 | % correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers | ||
1467 | % used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined. | ||
1468 | % | ||
1469 | \def\lineskipfactor{.08333} | ||
1470 | \def\strutheightpercent{.70833} | ||
1471 | \def\strutdepthpercent {.29167} | ||
1472 | % | ||
1473 | % can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this. | ||
1474 | \def\baselinefactor{1} | ||
1475 | % | ||
1476 | \def\setleading#1{% | ||
1477 | \dimen0 = #1\relax | ||
1478 | \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0 | ||
1479 | \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip | ||
1480 | \normalbaselines | ||
1481 | \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{% | ||
1482 | \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip | ||
1483 | depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip | ||
1484 | }% | ||
1485 | } | ||
1486 | |||
1487 | % PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap. | ||
1488 | % | ||
1489 | % do nothing with this by default. | ||
1490 | \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble | ||
1491 | \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble | ||
1492 | \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble | ||
1493 | |||
1494 | % if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps. | ||
1495 | % (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run | ||
1496 | % older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.) | ||
1497 | \ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\thisisundefined \else | ||
1498 | \begingroup | ||
1499 | \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. | ||
1500 | \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap | ||
1501 | %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) | ||
1502 | %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) | ||
1503 | %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0) | ||
1504 | %%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0) | ||
1505 | %%Version: 1.000 | ||
1506 | %%EndComments | ||
1507 | /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin | ||
1508 | 12 dict begin | ||
1509 | begincmap | ||
1510 | /CIDSystemInfo | ||
1511 | << /Registry (TeX) | ||
1512 | /Ordering (OT1) | ||
1513 | /Supplement 0 | ||
1514 | >> def | ||
1515 | /CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def | ||
1516 | /CMapType 2 def | ||
1517 | 1 begincodespacerange | ||
1518 | <00> <7F> | ||
1519 | endcodespacerange | ||
1520 | 8 beginbfrange | ||
1521 | <00> <01> <0393> | ||
1522 | <09> <0A> <03A8> | ||
1523 | <23> <26> <0023> | ||
1524 | <28> <3B> <0028> | ||
1525 | <3F> <5B> <003F> | ||
1526 | <5D> <5E> <005D> | ||
1527 | <61> <7A> <0061> | ||
1528 | <7B> <7C> <2013> | ||
1529 | endbfrange | ||
1530 | 40 beginbfchar | ||
1531 | <02> <0398> | ||
1532 | <03> <039B> | ||
1533 | <04> <039E> | ||
1534 | <05> <03A0> | ||
1535 | <06> <03A3> | ||
1536 | <07> <03D2> | ||
1537 | <08> <03A6> | ||
1538 | <0B> <00660066> | ||
1539 | <0C> <00660069> | ||
1540 | <0D> <0066006C> | ||
1541 | <0E> <006600660069> | ||
1542 | <0F> <00660066006C> | ||
1543 | <10> <0131> | ||
1544 | <11> <0237> | ||
1545 | <12> <0060> | ||
1546 | <13> <00B4> | ||
1547 | <14> <02C7> | ||
1548 | <15> <02D8> | ||
1549 | <16> <00AF> | ||
1550 | <17> <02DA> | ||
1551 | <18> <00B8> | ||
1552 | <19> <00DF> | ||
1553 | <1A> <00E6> | ||
1554 | <1B> <0153> | ||
1555 | <1C> <00F8> | ||
1556 | <1D> <00C6> | ||
1557 | <1E> <0152> | ||
1558 | <1F> <00D8> | ||
1559 | <21> <0021> | ||
1560 | <22> <201D> | ||
1561 | <27> <2019> | ||
1562 | <3C> <00A1> | ||
1563 | <3D> <003D> | ||
1564 | <3E> <00BF> | ||
1565 | <5C> <201C> | ||
1566 | <5F> <02D9> | ||
1567 | <60> <2018> | ||
1568 | <7D> <02DD> | ||
1569 | <7E> <007E> | ||
1570 | <7F> <00A8> | ||
1571 | endbfchar | ||
1572 | endcmap | ||
1573 | CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop | ||
1574 | end | ||
1575 | end | ||
1576 | %%EndResource | ||
1577 | %%EOF | ||
1578 | }\endgroup | ||
1579 | \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{% | ||
1580 | \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% | ||
1581 | }% | ||
1582 | % | ||
1583 | % \cmapOT1IT | ||
1584 | \begingroup | ||
1585 | \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. | ||
1586 | \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap | ||
1587 | %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) | ||
1588 | %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) | ||
1589 | %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0) | ||
1590 | %%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0) | ||
1591 | %%Version: 1.000 | ||
1592 | %%EndComments | ||
1593 | /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin | ||
1594 | 12 dict begin | ||
1595 | begincmap | ||
1596 | /CIDSystemInfo | ||
1597 | << /Registry (TeX) | ||
1598 | /Ordering (OT1IT) | ||
1599 | /Supplement 0 | ||
1600 | >> def | ||
1601 | /CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def | ||
1602 | /CMapType 2 def | ||
1603 | 1 begincodespacerange | ||
1604 | <00> <7F> | ||
1605 | endcodespacerange | ||
1606 | 8 beginbfrange | ||
1607 | <00> <01> <0393> | ||
1608 | <09> <0A> <03A8> | ||
1609 | <25> <26> <0025> | ||
1610 | <28> <3B> <0028> | ||
1611 | <3F> <5B> <003F> | ||
1612 | <5D> <5E> <005D> | ||
1613 | <61> <7A> <0061> | ||
1614 | <7B> <7C> <2013> | ||
1615 | endbfrange | ||
1616 | 42 beginbfchar | ||
1617 | <02> <0398> | ||
1618 | <03> <039B> | ||
1619 | <04> <039E> | ||
1620 | <05> <03A0> | ||
1621 | <06> <03A3> | ||
1622 | <07> <03D2> | ||
1623 | <08> <03A6> | ||
1624 | <0B> <00660066> | ||
1625 | <0C> <00660069> | ||
1626 | <0D> <0066006C> | ||
1627 | <0E> <006600660069> | ||
1628 | <0F> <00660066006C> | ||
1629 | <10> <0131> | ||
1630 | <11> <0237> | ||
1631 | <12> <0060> | ||
1632 | <13> <00B4> | ||
1633 | <14> <02C7> | ||
1634 | <15> <02D8> | ||
1635 | <16> <00AF> | ||
1636 | <17> <02DA> | ||
1637 | <18> <00B8> | ||
1638 | <19> <00DF> | ||
1639 | <1A> <00E6> | ||
1640 | <1B> <0153> | ||
1641 | <1C> <00F8> | ||
1642 | <1D> <00C6> | ||
1643 | <1E> <0152> | ||
1644 | <1F> <00D8> | ||
1645 | <21> <0021> | ||
1646 | <22> <201D> | ||
1647 | <23> <0023> | ||
1648 | <24> <00A3> | ||
1649 | <27> <2019> | ||
1650 | <3C> <00A1> | ||
1651 | <3D> <003D> | ||
1652 | <3E> <00BF> | ||
1653 | <5C> <201C> | ||
1654 | <5F> <02D9> | ||
1655 | <60> <2018> | ||
1656 | <7D> <02DD> | ||
1657 | <7E> <007E> | ||
1658 | <7F> <00A8> | ||
1659 | endbfchar | ||
1660 | endcmap | ||
1661 | CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop | ||
1662 | end | ||
1663 | end | ||
1664 | %%EndResource | ||
1665 | %%EOF | ||
1666 | }\endgroup | ||
1667 | \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{% | ||
1668 | \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% | ||
1669 | }% | ||
1670 | % | ||
1671 | % \cmapOT1TT | ||
1672 | \begingroup | ||
1673 | \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. | ||
1674 | \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap | ||
1675 | %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) | ||
1676 | %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) | ||
1677 | %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0) | ||
1678 | %%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0) | ||
1679 | %%Version: 1.000 | ||
1680 | %%EndComments | ||
1681 | /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin | ||
1682 | 12 dict begin | ||
1683 | begincmap | ||
1684 | /CIDSystemInfo | ||
1685 | << /Registry (TeX) | ||
1686 | /Ordering (OT1TT) | ||
1687 | /Supplement 0 | ||
1688 | >> def | ||
1689 | /CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def | ||
1690 | /CMapType 2 def | ||
1691 | 1 begincodespacerange | ||
1692 | <00> <7F> | ||
1693 | endcodespacerange | ||
1694 | 5 beginbfrange | ||
1695 | <00> <01> <0393> | ||
1696 | <09> <0A> <03A8> | ||
1697 | <21> <26> <0021> | ||
1698 | <28> <5F> <0028> | ||
1699 | <61> <7E> <0061> | ||
1700 | endbfrange | ||
1701 | 32 beginbfchar | ||
1702 | <02> <0398> | ||
1703 | <03> <039B> | ||
1704 | <04> <039E> | ||
1705 | <05> <03A0> | ||
1706 | <06> <03A3> | ||
1707 | <07> <03D2> | ||
1708 | <08> <03A6> | ||
1709 | <0B> <2191> | ||
1710 | <0C> <2193> | ||
1711 | <0D> <0027> | ||
1712 | <0E> <00A1> | ||
1713 | <0F> <00BF> | ||
1714 | <10> <0131> | ||
1715 | <11> <0237> | ||
1716 | <12> <0060> | ||
1717 | <13> <00B4> | ||
1718 | <14> <02C7> | ||
1719 | <15> <02D8> | ||
1720 | <16> <00AF> | ||
1721 | <17> <02DA> | ||
1722 | <18> <00B8> | ||
1723 | <19> <00DF> | ||
1724 | <1A> <00E6> | ||
1725 | <1B> <0153> | ||
1726 | <1C> <00F8> | ||
1727 | <1D> <00C6> | ||
1728 | <1E> <0152> | ||
1729 | <1F> <00D8> | ||
1730 | <20> <2423> | ||
1731 | <27> <2019> | ||
1732 | <60> <2018> | ||
1733 | <7F> <00A8> | ||
1734 | endbfchar | ||
1735 | endcmap | ||
1736 | CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop | ||
1737 | end | ||
1738 | end | ||
1739 | %%EndResource | ||
1740 | %%EOF | ||
1741 | }\endgroup | ||
1742 | \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{% | ||
1743 | \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% | ||
1744 | }% | ||
1745 | \fi\fi | ||
1746 | |||
1747 | |||
1748 | % Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the | ||
1749 | % specified font prefix (normally `cm'). | ||
1750 | % #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap | ||
1751 | % encoding (currently only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, pass | ||
1752 | % empty to omit). | ||
1753 | \def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{% | ||
1754 | \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4 | ||
1755 | \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1% | ||
1756 | } | ||
1757 | % This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty. | ||
1758 | \let\cmap\gobble | ||
1759 | % emacs-page end of cmaps | ||
1760 | |||
1761 | % Use cm as the default font prefix. | ||
1762 | % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix | ||
1763 | % before you read in texinfo.tex. | ||
1764 | \ifx\fontprefix\thisisundefined | ||
1765 | \def\fontprefix{cm} | ||
1766 | \fi | ||
1767 | % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM. | ||
1768 | \def\rmshape{r} | ||
1769 | \def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold | ||
1770 | \def\bfshape{b} | ||
1771 | \def\bxshape{bx} | ||
1772 | \def\ttshape{tt} | ||
1773 | \def\ttbshape{tt} | ||
1774 | \def\ttslshape{sltt} | ||
1775 | \def\itshape{ti} | ||
1776 | \def\itbshape{bxti} | ||
1777 | \def\slshape{sl} | ||
1778 | \def\slbshape{bxsl} | ||
1779 | \def\sfshape{ss} | ||
1780 | \def\sfbshape{ss} | ||
1781 | \def\scshape{csc} | ||
1782 | \def\scbshape{csc} | ||
1783 | |||
1784 | % Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. This is the default in | ||
1785 | % Texinfo. | ||
1786 | % | ||
1787 | \def\definetextfontsizexi{% | ||
1788 | % Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1). | ||
1789 | \def\textnominalsize{11pt} | ||
1790 | \edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf} | ||
1791 | \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} | ||
1792 | \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} | ||
1793 | \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} | ||
1794 | \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} | ||
1795 | \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} | ||
1796 | \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} | ||
1797 | \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} | ||
1798 | \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} | ||
1799 | \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep | ||
1800 | \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep | ||
1801 | \def\textecsize{1095} | ||
1802 | |||
1803 | % A few fonts for @defun names and args. | ||
1804 | \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} | ||
1805 | \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} | ||
1806 | \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} | ||
1807 | \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf} | ||
1808 | |||
1809 | % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). | ||
1810 | \def\smallnominalsize{9pt} | ||
1811 | \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} | ||
1812 | \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} | ||
1813 | \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} | ||
1814 | \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} | ||
1815 | \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} | ||
1816 | \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} | ||
1817 | \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} | ||
1818 | \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} | ||
1819 | \font\smalli=cmmi9 | ||
1820 | \font\smallsy=cmsy9 | ||
1821 | \def\smallecsize{0900} | ||
1822 | |||
1823 | % Fonts for small examples (8pt). | ||
1824 | \def\smallernominalsize{8pt} | ||
1825 | \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} | ||
1826 | \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} | ||
1827 | \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} | ||
1828 | \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} | ||
1829 | \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} | ||
1830 | \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} | ||
1831 | \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} | ||
1832 | \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} | ||
1833 | \font\smalleri=cmmi8 | ||
1834 | \font\smallersy=cmsy8 | ||
1835 | \def\smallerecsize{0800} | ||
1836 | |||
1837 | % Fonts for title page (20.4pt): | ||
1838 | \def\titlenominalsize{20pt} | ||
1839 | \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} | ||
1840 | \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} | ||
1841 | \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} | ||
1842 | \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} | ||
1843 | \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} | ||
1844 | \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} | ||
1845 | \let\titlebf=\titlerm | ||
1846 | \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} | ||
1847 | \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 | ||
1848 | \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 | ||
1849 | \def\titleecsize{2074} | ||
1850 | |||
1851 | % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt). | ||
1852 | \def\chapnominalsize{17pt} | ||
1853 | \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1} | ||
1854 | \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT} | ||
1855 | \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} | ||
1856 | \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} | ||
1857 | \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} | ||
1858 | \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1} | ||
1859 | \let\chapbf=\chaprm | ||
1860 | \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} | ||
1861 | \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 | ||
1862 | \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3 | ||
1863 | \def\chapecsize{1728} | ||
1864 | |||
1865 | % Section fonts (14.4pt). | ||
1866 | \def\secnominalsize{14pt} | ||
1867 | \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} | ||
1868 | \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} | ||
1869 | \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} | ||
1870 | \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} | ||
1871 | \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} | ||
1872 | \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} | ||
1873 | \let\secbf\secrm | ||
1874 | \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} | ||
1875 | \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 | ||
1876 | \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 | ||
1877 | \def\sececsize{1440} | ||
1878 | |||
1879 | % Subsection fonts (13.15pt). | ||
1880 | \def\ssecnominalsize{13pt} | ||
1881 | \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} | ||
1882 | \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT} | ||
1883 | \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} | ||
1884 | \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} | ||
1885 | \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT} | ||
1886 | \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} | ||
1887 | \let\ssecbf\ssecrm | ||
1888 | \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} | ||
1889 | \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf | ||
1890 | \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315 | ||
1891 | \def\ssececsize{1200} | ||
1892 | |||
1893 | % Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt). | ||
1894 | \def\reducednominalsize{10pt} | ||
1895 | \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1} | ||
1896 | \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} | ||
1897 | \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} | ||
1898 | \setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} | ||
1899 | \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1} | ||
1900 | \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} | ||
1901 | \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1} | ||
1902 | \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} | ||
1903 | \font\reducedi=cmmi10 | ||
1904 | \font\reducedsy=cmsy10 | ||
1905 | \def\reducedecsize{1000} | ||
1906 | |||
1907 | \textleading = 13.2pt % line spacing for 11pt CM | ||
1908 | \textfonts % reset the current fonts | ||
1909 | \rm | ||
1910 | } % end of 11pt text font size definitions | ||
1911 | |||
1912 | |||
1913 | % Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with | ||
1914 | % section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU | ||
1915 | % Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the | ||
1916 | % future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt. | ||
1917 | % | ||
1918 | \def\definetextfontsizex{% | ||
1919 | % Text fonts (10pt). | ||
1920 | \def\textnominalsize{10pt} | ||
1921 | \edef\mainmagstep{1000} | ||
1922 | \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} | ||
1923 | \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} | ||
1924 | \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} | ||
1925 | \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} | ||
1926 | \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} | ||
1927 | \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} | ||
1928 | \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} | ||
1929 | \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} | ||
1930 | \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep | ||
1931 | \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep | ||
1932 | \def\textecsize{1000} | ||
1933 | |||
1934 | % A few fonts for @defun names and args. | ||
1935 | \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1} | ||
1936 | \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} | ||
1937 | \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} | ||
1938 | \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf} | ||
1939 | |||
1940 | % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). | ||
1941 | \def\smallnominalsize{9pt} | ||
1942 | \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} | ||
1943 | \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} | ||
1944 | \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} | ||
1945 | \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} | ||
1946 | \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} | ||
1947 | \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} | ||
1948 | \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} | ||
1949 | \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} | ||
1950 | \font\smalli=cmmi9 | ||
1951 | \font\smallsy=cmsy9 | ||
1952 | \def\smallecsize{0900} | ||
1953 | |||
1954 | % Fonts for small examples (8pt). | ||
1955 | \def\smallernominalsize{8pt} | ||
1956 | \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} | ||
1957 | \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} | ||
1958 | \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} | ||
1959 | \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} | ||
1960 | \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} | ||
1961 | \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} | ||
1962 | \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} | ||
1963 | \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} | ||
1964 | \font\smalleri=cmmi8 | ||
1965 | \font\smallersy=cmsy8 | ||
1966 | \def\smallerecsize{0800} | ||
1967 | |||
1968 | % Fonts for title page (20.4pt): | ||
1969 | \def\titlenominalsize{20pt} | ||
1970 | \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} | ||
1971 | \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} | ||
1972 | \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} | ||
1973 | \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} | ||
1974 | \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} | ||
1975 | \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} | ||
1976 | \let\titlebf=\titlerm | ||
1977 | \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} | ||
1978 | \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 | ||
1979 | \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 | ||
1980 | \def\titleecsize{2074} | ||
1981 | |||
1982 | % Chapter fonts (14.4pt). | ||
1983 | \def\chapnominalsize{14pt} | ||
1984 | \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} | ||
1985 | \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} | ||
1986 | \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} | ||
1987 | \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} | ||
1988 | \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} | ||
1989 | \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} | ||
1990 | \let\chapbf\chaprm | ||
1991 | \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} | ||
1992 | \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 | ||
1993 | \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 | ||
1994 | \def\chapecsize{1440} | ||
1995 | |||
1996 | % Section fonts (12pt). | ||
1997 | \def\secnominalsize{12pt} | ||
1998 | \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} | ||
1999 | \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT} | ||
2000 | \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} | ||
2001 | \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} | ||
2002 | \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} | ||
2003 | \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} | ||
2004 | \let\secbf\secrm | ||
2005 | \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} | ||
2006 | \font\seci=cmmi12 | ||
2007 | \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1 | ||
2008 | \def\sececsize{1200} | ||
2009 | |||
2010 | % Subsection fonts (10pt). | ||
2011 | \def\ssecnominalsize{10pt} | ||
2012 | \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} | ||
2013 | \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} | ||
2014 | \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} | ||
2015 | \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} | ||
2016 | \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} | ||
2017 | \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} | ||
2018 | \let\ssecbf\ssecrm | ||
2019 | \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} | ||
2020 | \font\sseci=cmmi10 | ||
2021 | \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 | ||
2022 | \def\ssececsize{1000} | ||
2023 | |||
2024 | % Reduced fonts for @acro in text (9pt). | ||
2025 | \def\reducednominalsize{9pt} | ||
2026 | \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} | ||
2027 | \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} | ||
2028 | \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} | ||
2029 | \setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} | ||
2030 | \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} | ||
2031 | \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} | ||
2032 | \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} | ||
2033 | \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} | ||
2034 | \font\reducedi=cmmi9 | ||
2035 | \font\reducedsy=cmsy9 | ||
2036 | \def\reducedecsize{0900} | ||
2037 | |||
2038 | \divide\parskip by 2 % reduce space between paragraphs | ||
2039 | \textleading = 12pt % line spacing for 10pt CM | ||
2040 | \textfonts % reset the current fonts | ||
2041 | \rm | ||
2042 | } % end of 10pt text font size definitions | ||
2043 | |||
2044 | |||
2045 | % We provide the user-level command | ||
2046 | % @fonttextsize 10 | ||
2047 | % (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed. | ||
2048 | % | ||
2049 | \def\xiword{11} | ||
2050 | \def\xword{10} | ||
2051 | \def\xwordpt{10pt} | ||
2052 | % | ||
2053 | \parseargdef\fonttextsize{% | ||
2054 | \def\textsizearg{#1}% | ||
2055 | %\wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}% | ||
2056 | % | ||
2057 | % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since | ||
2058 | % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless. | ||
2059 | % | ||
2060 | \begingroup \globaldefs=1 | ||
2061 | \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex | ||
2062 | \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi | ||
2063 | \else | ||
2064 | \errhelp=\EMsimple | ||
2065 | \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'} | ||
2066 | \fi\fi | ||
2067 | \endgroup | ||
2068 | } | ||
2069 | |||
2070 | |||
2071 | % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, | ||
2072 | % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since | ||
2073 | % texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except | ||
2074 | % in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and | ||
2075 | % \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts). | ||
2076 | % | ||
2077 | \def\resetmathfonts{% | ||
2078 | \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy | ||
2079 | \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf | ||
2080 | \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf | ||
2081 | } | ||
2082 | |||
2083 | % The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead | ||
2084 | % of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the | ||
2085 | % current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire | ||
2086 | % \tenSTYLE to set the current font. | ||
2087 | % | ||
2088 | % Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower) | ||
2089 | % and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used in | ||
2090 | % the LaTeX logo and acronyms. | ||
2091 | % | ||
2092 | % This all needs generalizing, badly. | ||
2093 | % | ||
2094 | \def\textfonts{% | ||
2095 | \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl | ||
2096 | \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc | ||
2097 | \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy | ||
2098 | \let\tenttsl=\textttsl | ||
2099 | \def\curfontsize{text}% | ||
2100 | \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}% | ||
2101 | \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}} | ||
2102 | \def\titlefonts{% | ||
2103 | \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl | ||
2104 | \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc | ||
2105 | \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy | ||
2106 | \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl | ||
2107 | \def\curfontsize{title}% | ||
2108 | \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}% | ||
2109 | \resetmathfonts \setleading{27pt}} | ||
2110 | \def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1}} | ||
2111 | \def\chapfonts{% | ||
2112 | \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl | ||
2113 | \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc | ||
2114 | \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy | ||
2115 | \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl | ||
2116 | \def\curfontsize{chap}% | ||
2117 | \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}% | ||
2118 | \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}} | ||
2119 | \def\secfonts{% | ||
2120 | \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl | ||
2121 | \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc | ||
2122 | \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy | ||
2123 | \let\tenttsl=\secttsl | ||
2124 | \def\curfontsize{sec}% | ||
2125 | \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}% | ||
2126 | \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}} | ||
2127 | \def\subsecfonts{% | ||
2128 | \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl | ||
2129 | \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc | ||
2130 | \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy | ||
2131 | \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl | ||
2132 | \def\curfontsize{ssec}% | ||
2133 | \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}% | ||
2134 | \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}} | ||
2135 | \let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts | ||
2136 | \def\reducedfonts{% | ||
2137 | \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl | ||
2138 | \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc | ||
2139 | \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy | ||
2140 | \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl | ||
2141 | \def\curfontsize{reduced}% | ||
2142 | \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}% | ||
2143 | \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} | ||
2144 | \def\smallfonts{% | ||
2145 | \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl | ||
2146 | \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc | ||
2147 | \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy | ||
2148 | \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl | ||
2149 | \def\curfontsize{small}% | ||
2150 | \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% | ||
2151 | \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} | ||
2152 | \def\smallerfonts{% | ||
2153 | \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl | ||
2154 | \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc | ||
2155 | \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy | ||
2156 | \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl | ||
2157 | \def\curfontsize{smaller}% | ||
2158 | \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% | ||
2159 | \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}} | ||
2160 | |||
2161 | % Fonts for short table of contents. | ||
2162 | \setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1} | ||
2163 | \setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12 | ||
2164 | \setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1} | ||
2165 | \setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} | ||
2166 | |||
2167 | % Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts. | ||
2168 | \def\angleleft{$\langle$} | ||
2169 | \def\angleright{$\rangle$} | ||
2170 | |||
2171 | % Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments. | ||
2172 | \let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts | ||
2173 | |||
2174 | % About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample | ||
2175 | % can fit this many characters: | ||
2176 | % 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69 | ||
2177 | % If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters: | ||
2178 | % 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77 | ||
2179 | % For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth | ||
2180 | % the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt. | ||
2181 | % | ||
2182 | % By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt): | ||
2183 | % 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58 | ||
2184 | % --karl, 24jan03. | ||
2185 | |||
2186 | % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. | ||
2187 | % | ||
2188 | \definetextfontsizexi | ||
2189 | |||
2190 | |||
2191 | \message{markup,} | ||
2192 | |||
2193 | % Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the | ||
2194 | % Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and | ||
2195 | % shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have | ||
2196 | % this property, we can check that font parameter. | ||
2197 | % | ||
2198 | \def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt } | ||
2199 | |||
2200 | % Markup style infrastructure. \defmarkupstylesetup\INITMACRO will | ||
2201 | % define and register \INITMACRO to be called on markup style changes. | ||
2202 | % \INITMACRO can check \currentmarkupstyle for the innermost | ||
2203 | % style and the set of \ifmarkupSTYLE switches for all styles | ||
2204 | % currently in effect. | ||
2205 | \newif\ifmarkupvar | ||
2206 | \newif\ifmarkupsamp | ||
2207 | \newif\ifmarkupkey | ||
2208 | %\newif\ifmarkupfile % @file == @samp. | ||
2209 | %\newif\ifmarkupoption % @option == @samp. | ||
2210 | \newif\ifmarkupcode | ||
2211 | \newif\ifmarkupkbd | ||
2212 | %\newif\ifmarkupenv % @env == @code. | ||
2213 | %\newif\ifmarkupcommand % @command == @code. | ||
2214 | \newif\ifmarkuptex % @tex (and part of @math, for now). | ||
2215 | \newif\ifmarkupexample | ||
2216 | \newif\ifmarkupverb | ||
2217 | \newif\ifmarkupverbatim | ||
2218 | |||
2219 | \let\currentmarkupstyle\empty | ||
2220 | |||
2221 | \def\setupmarkupstyle#1{% | ||
2222 | \csname markup#1true\endcsname | ||
2223 | \def\currentmarkupstyle{#1}% | ||
2224 | \markupstylesetup | ||
2225 | } | ||
2226 | |||
2227 | \let\markupstylesetup\empty | ||
2228 | |||
2229 | \def\defmarkupstylesetup#1{% | ||
2230 | \expandafter\def\expandafter\markupstylesetup | ||
2231 | \expandafter{\markupstylesetup #1}% | ||
2232 | \def#1% | ||
2233 | } | ||
2234 | |||
2235 | % Markup style setup for left and right quotes. | ||
2236 | \defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{% | ||
2237 | \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp | ||
2238 | \csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname | ||
2239 | \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi | ||
2240 | } | ||
2241 | |||
2242 | \defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{% | ||
2243 | \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp | ||
2244 | \csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname | ||
2245 | \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi | ||
2246 | } | ||
2247 | |||
2248 | { | ||
2249 | \catcode`\'=\active | ||
2250 | \catcode`\`=\active | ||
2251 | |||
2252 | \gdef\markupsetuplqdefault{\let`\lq} | ||
2253 | \gdef\markupsetuprqdefault{\let'\rq} | ||
2254 | |||
2255 | \gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`\codequoteleft} | ||
2256 | \gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'\codequoteright} | ||
2257 | |||
2258 | \gdef\markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft{\let`\noligaturesquoteleft} | ||
2259 | } | ||
2260 | |||
2261 | \let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft | ||
2262 | \let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright | ||
2263 | % | ||
2264 | \let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft | ||
2265 | \let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright | ||
2266 | % | ||
2267 | \let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetcodequoteleft | ||
2268 | \let\markupsetuprqsamp \markupsetcodequoteright | ||
2269 | % | ||
2270 | \let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft | ||
2271 | \let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright | ||
2272 | % | ||
2273 | \let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft | ||
2274 | \let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright | ||
2275 | |||
2276 | \let\markupsetuplqkbd \markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft | ||
2277 | |||
2278 | % Allow an option to not use regular directed right quote/apostrophe | ||
2279 | % (char 0x27), but instead the undirected quote from cmtt (char 0x0d). | ||
2280 | % The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it the default, but it | ||
2281 | % works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least evince), the | ||
2282 | % lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the regular 0x27. | ||
2283 | % | ||
2284 | \def\codequoteright{% | ||
2285 | \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax | ||
2286 | \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax | ||
2287 | '% | ||
2288 | \else \char'15 \fi | ||
2289 | \else \char'15 \fi | ||
2290 | } | ||
2291 | % | ||
2292 | % and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent. | ||
2293 | % Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like | ||
2294 | % the code environments to do likewise. | ||
2295 | % | ||
2296 | \def\codequoteleft{% | ||
2297 | \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax | ||
2298 | \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax | ||
2299 | % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391 | ||
2300 | % \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. | ||
2301 | \relax`% | ||
2302 | \else \char'22 \fi | ||
2303 | \else \char'22 \fi | ||
2304 | } | ||
2305 | |||
2306 | % Commands to set the quote options. | ||
2307 | % | ||
2308 | \parseargdef\codequoteundirected{% | ||
2309 | \def\temp{#1}% | ||
2310 | \ifx\temp\onword | ||
2311 | \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname | ||
2312 | = t% | ||
2313 | \else\ifx\temp\offword | ||
2314 | \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname | ||
2315 | = \relax | ||
2316 | \else | ||
2317 | \errhelp = \EMsimple | ||
2318 | \errmessage{Unknown @codequoteundirected value `\temp', must be on|off}% | ||
2319 | \fi\fi | ||
2320 | } | ||
2321 | % | ||
2322 | \parseargdef\codequotebacktick{% | ||
2323 | \def\temp{#1}% | ||
2324 | \ifx\temp\onword | ||
2325 | \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname | ||
2326 | = t% | ||
2327 | \else\ifx\temp\offword | ||
2328 | \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname | ||
2329 | = \relax | ||
2330 | \else | ||
2331 | \errhelp = \EMsimple | ||
2332 | \errmessage{Unknown @codequotebacktick value `\temp', must be on|off}% | ||
2333 | \fi\fi | ||
2334 | } | ||
2335 | |||
2336 | % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. | ||
2337 | \def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq} | ||
2338 | |||
2339 | % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks | ||
2340 | \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 | ||
2341 | |||
2342 | % Font commands. | ||
2343 | |||
2344 | % #1 is the font command (\sl or \it), #2 is the text to slant. | ||
2345 | % If we are in a monospaced environment, however, 1) always use \ttsl, | ||
2346 | % and 2) do not add an italic correction. | ||
2347 | \def\dosmartslant#1#2{% | ||
2348 | \ifusingtt | ||
2349 | {{\ttsl #2}\let\next=\relax}% | ||
2350 | {\def\next{{#1#2}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}}% | ||
2351 | \next | ||
2352 | } | ||
2353 | \def\smartslanted{\dosmartslant\sl} | ||
2354 | \def\smartitalic{\dosmartslant\it} | ||
2355 | |||
2356 | % Output an italic correction unless \next (presumed to be the following | ||
2357 | % character) is such as not to need one. | ||
2358 | \def\smartitaliccorrection{% | ||
2359 | \ifx\next,% | ||
2360 | \else\ifx\next-% | ||
2361 | \else\ifx\next.% | ||
2362 | \else\ptexslash | ||
2363 | \fi\fi\fi | ||
2364 | \aftersmartic | ||
2365 | } | ||
2366 | |||
2367 | % like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl, and no ic. | ||
2368 | % @var is set to this for defun arguments. | ||
2369 | \def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}} | ||
2370 | |||
2371 | % @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want | ||
2372 | % ttsl for book titles, do we? | ||
2373 | \def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection} | ||
2374 | |||
2375 | \def\aftersmartic{} | ||
2376 | \def\var#1{% | ||
2377 | \let\saveaftersmartic = \aftersmartic | ||
2378 | \def\aftersmartic{\null\let\aftersmartic=\saveaftersmartic}% | ||
2379 | \smartslanted{#1}% | ||
2380 | } | ||
2381 | |||
2382 | \let\i=\smartitalic | ||
2383 | \let\slanted=\smartslanted | ||
2384 | \let\dfn=\smartslanted | ||
2385 | \let\emph=\smartitalic | ||
2386 | |||
2387 | % Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii. | ||
2388 | \def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font | ||
2389 | \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font | ||
2390 | \def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font | ||
2391 | |||
2392 | % @b, explicit bold. Also @strong. | ||
2393 | \def\b#1{{\bf #1}} | ||
2394 | \let\strong=\b | ||
2395 | |||
2396 | % @sansserif, explicit sans. | ||
2397 | \def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}} | ||
2398 | |||
2399 | % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at | ||
2400 | % the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the | ||
2401 | % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called. | ||
2402 | % | ||
2403 | \def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation} | ||
2404 | \def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- } | ||
2405 | |||
2406 | % Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value. | ||
2407 | % Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and | ||
2408 | % sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up. | ||
2409 | % | ||
2410 | \catcode`@=11 | ||
2411 | \def\plainfrenchspacing{% | ||
2412 | \sfcode\dotChar =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m | ||
2413 | \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m | ||
2414 | \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends | ||
2415 | } | ||
2416 | \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{% | ||
2417 | \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000 | ||
2418 | \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250 | ||
2419 | \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends | ||
2420 | } | ||
2421 | \catcode`@=\other | ||
2422 | \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default | ||
2423 | |||
2424 | % @t, explicit typewriter. | ||
2425 | \def\t#1{% | ||
2426 | {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}% | ||
2427 | \null | ||
2428 | } | ||
2429 | |||
2430 | % @samp. | ||
2431 | \def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}} | ||
2432 | |||
2433 | % definition of @key that produces a lozenge. Doesn't adjust to text size. | ||
2434 | %\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} | ||
2435 | %\font\keysy=cmsy9 | ||
2436 | %\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{% | ||
2437 | % \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{% | ||
2438 | % \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt | ||
2439 | % \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}% | ||
2440 | % \kern-0.4pt\hrule}% | ||
2441 | % \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}} | ||
2442 | |||
2443 | % definition of @key with no lozenge. If the current font is already | ||
2444 | % monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle. But | ||
2445 | % if it isn't monospace, then use \tt. | ||
2446 | % | ||
2447 | \def\key#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key}% | ||
2448 | \nohyphenation | ||
2449 | \ifmonospace\else\tt\fi | ||
2450 | #1}\null} | ||
2451 | |||
2452 | % ctrl is no longer a Texinfo command. | ||
2453 | \def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1} | ||
2454 | |||
2455 | % @file, @option are the same as @samp. | ||
2456 | \let\file=\samp | ||
2457 | \let\option=\samp | ||
2458 | |||
2459 | % @code is a modification of @t, | ||
2460 | % which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text. | ||
2461 | \def\tclose#1{% | ||
2462 | {% | ||
2463 | % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font. | ||
2464 | \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font | ||
2465 | % | ||
2466 | % Switch to typewriter. | ||
2467 | \tt | ||
2468 | % | ||
2469 | % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space. | ||
2470 | \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}% | ||
2471 | % | ||
2472 | % Turn off hyphenation. | ||
2473 | \nohyphenation | ||
2474 | % | ||
2475 | \rawbackslash | ||
2476 | \plainfrenchspacing | ||
2477 | #1% | ||
2478 | }% | ||
2479 | \null % reset spacefactor to 1000 | ||
2480 | } | ||
2481 | |||
2482 | % We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code. | ||
2483 | % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes | ||
2484 | % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc. | ||
2485 | |||
2486 | % Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control | ||
2487 | % both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words. | ||
2488 | % We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that) | ||
2489 | % and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. | ||
2490 | % -- rms. | ||
2491 | { | ||
2492 | \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active | ||
2493 | \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active | ||
2494 | \global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq % default definitions | ||
2495 | % | ||
2496 | \global\def\code{\begingroup | ||
2497 | \setupmarkupstyle{code}% | ||
2498 | % The following should really be moved into \setupmarkupstyle handlers. | ||
2499 | \catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active | ||
2500 | \ifallowcodebreaks | ||
2501 | \let-\codedash | ||
2502 | \let_\codeunder | ||
2503 | \else | ||
2504 | \let-\realdash | ||
2505 | \let_\realunder | ||
2506 | \fi | ||
2507 | \codex | ||
2508 | } | ||
2509 | } | ||
2510 | |||
2511 | \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} | ||
2512 | |||
2513 | \def\realdash{-} | ||
2514 | \def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}} | ||
2515 | \def\codeunder{% | ||
2516 | % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _ | ||
2517 | % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.) | ||
2518 | % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us | ||
2519 | % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop. | ||
2520 | \ifusingtt{\ifmmode | ||
2521 | \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_. | ||
2522 | \else\normalunderscore \fi | ||
2523 | \discretionary{}{}{}}% | ||
2524 | {\_}% | ||
2525 | } | ||
2526 | |||
2527 | % An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g., | ||
2528 | % each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is undesirable in | ||
2529 | % some manuals, especially if they don't have long identifiers in | ||
2530 | % general. @allowcodebreaks provides a way to control this. | ||
2531 | % | ||
2532 | \newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue | ||
2533 | |||
2534 | \def\keywordtrue{true} | ||
2535 | \def\keywordfalse{false} | ||
2536 | |||
2537 | \parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{% | ||
2538 | \def\txiarg{#1}% | ||
2539 | \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue | ||
2540 | \allowcodebreakstrue | ||
2541 | \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse | ||
2542 | \allowcodebreaksfalse | ||
2543 | \else | ||
2544 | \errhelp = \EMsimple | ||
2545 | \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg', must be true|false}% | ||
2546 | \fi\fi | ||
2547 | } | ||
2548 | |||
2549 | % @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated) | ||
2550 | % second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third | ||
2551 | % arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url | ||
2552 | % itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. | ||
2553 | % (This \urefnobreak definition isn't used now, leaving it for a while | ||
2554 | % for comparison.) | ||
2555 | \def\urefnobreak#1{\dourefnobreak #1,,,\finish} | ||
2556 | \def\dourefnobreak#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup | ||
2557 | \unsepspaces | ||
2558 | \pdfurl{#1}% | ||
2559 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% | ||
2560 | \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt | ||
2561 | \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that | ||
2562 | \else | ||
2563 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% | ||
2564 | \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt | ||
2565 | \ifpdf | ||
2566 | \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it | ||
2567 | \else | ||
2568 | \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url | ||
2569 | \fi | ||
2570 | \else | ||
2571 | \code{#1}% only url given, so show it | ||
2572 | \fi | ||
2573 | \fi | ||
2574 | \endlink | ||
2575 | \endgroup} | ||
2576 | |||
2577 | % This \urefbreak definition is the active one. | ||
2578 | \def\urefbreak{\begingroup \urefcatcodes \dourefbreak} | ||
2579 | \let\uref=\urefbreak | ||
2580 | \def\dourefbreak#1{\urefbreakfinish #1,,,\finish} | ||
2581 | \def\urefbreakfinish#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% doesn't work in @example | ||
2582 | \unsepspaces | ||
2583 | \pdfurl{#1}% | ||
2584 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% | ||
2585 | \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt | ||
2586 | \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that | ||
2587 | \else | ||
2588 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% | ||
2589 | \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt | ||
2590 | \ifpdf | ||
2591 | \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it | ||
2592 | \else | ||
2593 | \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url | ||
2594 | \fi | ||
2595 | \else | ||
2596 | \urefcode{#1}% only url given, so show it | ||
2597 | \fi | ||
2598 | \fi | ||
2599 | \endlink | ||
2600 | \endgroup} | ||
2601 | |||
2602 | % Allow line breaks around only a few characters (only). | ||
2603 | \def\urefcatcodes{% | ||
2604 | \catcode\ampChar=\active \catcode\dotChar=\active | ||
2605 | \catcode\hashChar=\active \catcode\questChar=\active | ||
2606 | \catcode\slashChar=\active | ||
2607 | } | ||
2608 | { | ||
2609 | \urefcatcodes | ||
2610 | % | ||
2611 | \global\def\urefcode{\begingroup | ||
2612 | \setupmarkupstyle{code}% | ||
2613 | \urefcatcodes | ||
2614 | \let&\urefcodeamp | ||
2615 | \let.\urefcodedot | ||
2616 | \let#\urefcodehash | ||
2617 | \let?\urefcodequest | ||
2618 | \let/\urefcodeslash | ||
2619 | \codex | ||
2620 | } | ||
2621 | % | ||
2622 | % By default, they are just regular characters. | ||
2623 | \global\def&{\normalamp} | ||
2624 | \global\def.{\normaldot} | ||
2625 | \global\def#{\normalhash} | ||
2626 | \global\def?{\normalquest} | ||
2627 | \global\def/{\normalslash} | ||
2628 | } | ||
2629 | |||
2630 | % we put a little stretch before and after the breakable chars, to help | ||
2631 | % line breaking of long url's. The unequal skips make look better in | ||
2632 | % cmtt at least, especially for dots. | ||
2633 | \def\urefprestretch{\urefprebreak \hskip0pt plus.13em } | ||
2634 | \def\urefpoststretch{\urefpostbreak \hskip0pt plus.1em } | ||
2635 | % | ||
2636 | \def\urefcodeamp{\urefprestretch \&\urefpoststretch} | ||
2637 | \def\urefcodedot{\urefprestretch .\urefpoststretch} | ||
2638 | \def\urefcodehash{\urefprestretch \#\urefpoststretch} | ||
2639 | \def\urefcodequest{\urefprestretch ?\urefpoststretch} | ||
2640 | \def\urefcodeslash{\futurelet\next\urefcodeslashfinish} | ||
2641 | { | ||
2642 | \catcode`\/=\active | ||
2643 | \global\def\urefcodeslashfinish{% | ||
2644 | \urefprestretch \slashChar | ||
2645 | % Allow line break only after the final / in a sequence of | ||
2646 | % slashes, to avoid line break between the slashes in http://. | ||
2647 | \ifx\next/\else \urefpoststretch \fi | ||
2648 | } | ||
2649 | } | ||
2650 | |||
2651 | % One more complication: by default we'll break after the special | ||
2652 | % characters, but some people like to break before the special chars, so | ||
2653 | % allow that. Also allow no breaking at all, for manual control. | ||
2654 | % | ||
2655 | \parseargdef\urefbreakstyle{% | ||
2656 | \def\txiarg{#1}% | ||
2657 | \ifx\txiarg\wordnone | ||
2658 | \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak} | ||
2659 | \else\ifx\txiarg\wordbefore | ||
2660 | \def\urefprebreak{\allowbreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak} | ||
2661 | \else\ifx\txiarg\wordafter | ||
2662 | \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\allowbreak} | ||
2663 | \else | ||
2664 | \errhelp = \EMsimple | ||
2665 | \errmessage{Unknown @urefbreakstyle setting `\txiarg'}% | ||
2666 | \fi\fi\fi | ||
2667 | } | ||
2668 | \def\wordafter{after} | ||
2669 | \def\wordbefore{before} | ||
2670 | \def\wordnone{none} | ||
2671 | |||
2672 | \urefbreakstyle after | ||
2673 | |||
2674 | % @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it. | ||
2675 | % | ||
2676 | \let\url=\uref | ||
2677 | |||
2678 | % rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97. | ||
2679 | % So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf. | ||
2680 | % | ||
2681 | %\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright} | ||
2682 | \ifpdf | ||
2683 | \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} | ||
2684 | \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup | ||
2685 | \unsepspaces | ||
2686 | \pdfurl{mailto:#1}% | ||
2687 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% | ||
2688 | \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi | ||
2689 | \endlink | ||
2690 | \endgroup} | ||
2691 | \else | ||
2692 | \let\email=\uref | ||
2693 | \fi | ||
2694 | |||
2695 | % @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, | ||
2696 | % then @kbd has no effect. | ||
2697 | \def\kbd#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}} | ||
2698 | |||
2699 | % @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always), | ||
2700 | % `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends), | ||
2701 | % or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always). | ||
2702 | \parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{% | ||
2703 | \def\txiarg{#1}% | ||
2704 | \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct | ||
2705 | \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}% | ||
2706 | \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample | ||
2707 | \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% | ||
2708 | \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode | ||
2709 | \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% | ||
2710 | \else | ||
2711 | \errhelp = \EMsimple | ||
2712 | \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle setting `\txiarg'}% | ||
2713 | \fi\fi\fi | ||
2714 | } | ||
2715 | \def\worddistinct{distinct} | ||
2716 | \def\wordexample{example} | ||
2717 | \def\wordcode{code} | ||
2718 | |||
2719 | % Default is `distinct'. | ||
2720 | \kbdinputstyle distinct | ||
2721 | |||
2722 | \def\xkey{\key} | ||
2723 | \def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% | ||
2724 | \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% | ||
2725 | \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi | ||
2726 | \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi} | ||
2727 | |||
2728 | % For @indicateurl, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code. | ||
2729 | \let\indicateurl=\code | ||
2730 | \let\env=\code | ||
2731 | \let\command=\code | ||
2732 | |||
2733 | % @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...} | ||
2734 | \def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup} | ||
2735 | |||
2736 | % @clickstyle @arrow (by default) | ||
2737 | \parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}} | ||
2738 | \def\click{\arrow} | ||
2739 | |||
2740 | % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the | ||
2741 | % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt. | ||
2742 | % | ||
2743 | \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} | ||
2744 | |||
2745 | % @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'', | ||
2746 | % and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for | ||
2747 | % Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96. | ||
2748 | %\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null} | ||
2749 | |||
2750 | % @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like. | ||
2751 | % We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for | ||
2752 | % all-uppercase. | ||
2753 | % | ||
2754 | \def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish} | ||
2755 | \def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{% | ||
2756 | {\selectfonts\lsize #1}% | ||
2757 | \def\temp{#2}% | ||
2758 | \ifx\temp\empty \else | ||
2759 | \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% | ||
2760 | \fi | ||
2761 | \null % reset \spacefactor=1000 | ||
2762 | } | ||
2763 | |||
2764 | % @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like. | ||
2765 | % No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing. | ||
2766 | % | ||
2767 | \def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish} | ||
2768 | \def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{% | ||
2769 | {\plainfrenchspacing #1}% | ||
2770 | \def\temp{#2}% | ||
2771 | \ifx\temp\empty \else | ||
2772 | \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% | ||
2773 | \fi | ||
2774 | \null % reset \spacefactor=1000 | ||
2775 | } | ||
2776 | |||
2777 | % @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example. | ||
2778 | % | ||
2779 | \def\asis#1{#1} | ||
2780 | |||
2781 | % @math outputs its argument in math mode. | ||
2782 | % | ||
2783 | % One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean | ||
2784 | % an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make | ||
2785 | % _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam, | ||
2786 | % which is what @var uses. | ||
2787 | { | ||
2788 | \catcode`\_ = \active | ||
2789 | \gdef\mathunderscore{% | ||
2790 | \catcode`\_=\active | ||
2791 | \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}% | ||
2792 | } | ||
2793 | } | ||
2794 | % Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a math (or tt) \. | ||
2795 | % FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (for no | ||
2796 | % particular reason), but this is not advertised and we don't care. | ||
2797 | % | ||
2798 | % The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\. | ||
2799 | \def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi} | ||
2800 | % | ||
2801 | \def\math{% | ||
2802 | \tex | ||
2803 | \mathunderscore | ||
2804 | \let\\ = \mathbackslash | ||
2805 | \mathactive | ||
2806 | % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode | ||
2807 | \let\"=\ddot | ||
2808 | \let\'=\acute | ||
2809 | \let\==\bar | ||
2810 | \let\^=\hat | ||
2811 | \let\`=\grave | ||
2812 | \let\u=\breve | ||
2813 | \let\v=\check | ||
2814 | \let\~=\tilde | ||
2815 | \let\dotaccent=\dot | ||
2816 | $\finishmath | ||
2817 | } | ||
2818 | \def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex. | ||
2819 | |||
2820 | % Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math. | ||
2821 | % We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument | ||
2822 | % to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section). | ||
2823 | % | ||
2824 | { | ||
2825 | \catcode`^ = \active | ||
2826 | \catcode`< = \active | ||
2827 | \catcode`> = \active | ||
2828 | \catcode`+ = \active | ||
2829 | \catcode`' = \active | ||
2830 | \gdef\mathactive{% | ||
2831 | \let^ = \ptexhat | ||
2832 | \let< = \ptexless | ||
2833 | \let> = \ptexgtr | ||
2834 | \let+ = \ptexplus | ||
2835 | \let' = \ptexquoteright | ||
2836 | } | ||
2837 | } | ||
2838 | |||
2839 | % @inlinefmt{FMTNAME,PROCESSED-TEXT} and @inlineraw{FMTNAME,RAW-TEXT}. | ||
2840 | % Ignore unless FMTNAME == tex; then it is like @iftex and @tex, | ||
2841 | % except specified as a normal braced arg, so no newlines to worry about. | ||
2842 | % | ||
2843 | \def\outfmtnametex{tex} | ||
2844 | % | ||
2845 | \def\inlinefmt#1{\doinlinefmt #1,\finish} | ||
2846 | \def\doinlinefmt#1,#2,\finish{% | ||
2847 | \def\inlinefmtname{#1}% | ||
2848 | \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi | ||
2849 | } | ||
2850 | % For raw, must switch into @tex before parsing the argument, to avoid | ||
2851 | % setting catcodes prematurely. Doing it this way means that, for | ||
2852 | % example, @inlineraw{html, foo{bar} gets a parse error instead of being | ||
2853 | % ignored. But this isn't important because if people want a literal | ||
2854 | % *right* brace they would have to use a command anyway, so they may as | ||
2855 | % well use a command to get a left brace too. We could re-use the | ||
2856 | % delimiter character idea from \verb, but it seems like overkill. | ||
2857 | % | ||
2858 | \def\inlineraw{\tex \doinlineraw} | ||
2859 | \def\doinlineraw#1{\doinlinerawtwo #1,\finish} | ||
2860 | \def\doinlinerawtwo#1,#2,\finish{% | ||
2861 | \def\inlinerawname{#1}% | ||
2862 | \ifx\inlinerawname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi | ||
2863 | \endgroup % close group opened by \tex. | ||
2864 | } | ||
2865 | |||
2866 | |||
2867 | \message{glyphs,} | ||
2868 | % and logos. | ||
2869 | |||
2870 | % @@ prints an @, as does @atchar{}. | ||
2871 | \def\@{\char64 } | ||
2872 | \let\atchar=\@ | ||
2873 | |||
2874 | % @{ @} @lbracechar{} @rbracechar{} all generate brace characters. | ||
2875 | % Unless we're in typewriter, use \ecfont because the CM text fonts do | ||
2876 | % not have braces, and we don't want to switch into math. | ||
2877 | \def\mylbrace{{\ifmonospace\else\ecfont\fi \char123}} | ||
2878 | \def\myrbrace{{\ifmonospace\else\ecfont\fi \char125}} | ||
2879 | \let\{=\mylbrace \let\lbracechar=\{ | ||
2880 | \let\}=\myrbrace \let\rbracechar=\} | ||
2881 | \begingroup | ||
2882 | % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices, | ||
2883 | % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files. | ||
2884 | \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other | ||
2885 | \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2 | ||
2886 | \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other | ||
2887 | !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]% | ||
2888 | !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]% | ||
2889 | !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]% | ||
2890 | !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]% | ||
2891 | !endgroup | ||
2892 | |||
2893 | % @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems. | ||
2894 | \let\comma = , | ||
2895 | |||
2896 | % Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent | ||
2897 | % Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H. | ||
2898 | \let\, = \ptexc | ||
2899 | \let\dotaccent = \ptexdot | ||
2900 | \def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}} | ||
2901 | \let\tieaccent = \ptext | ||
2902 | \let\ubaraccent = \ptexb | ||
2903 | \let\udotaccent = \d | ||
2904 | |||
2905 | % Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm | ||
2906 | % Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss. | ||
2907 | \def\questiondown{?`} | ||
2908 | \def\exclamdown{!`} | ||
2909 | \def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}} | ||
2910 | \def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}} | ||
2911 | |||
2912 | % Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents. | ||
2913 | \def\imacro{i} | ||
2914 | \def\jmacro{j} | ||
2915 | \def\dotless#1{% | ||
2916 | \def\temp{#1}% | ||
2917 | \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi | ||
2918 | \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi | ||
2919 | \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}% | ||
2920 | \fi\fi | ||
2921 | } | ||
2922 | |||
2923 | % The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a | ||
2924 | % period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.) | ||
2925 | % | ||
2926 | \edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 } | ||
2927 | |||
2928 | % @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in | ||
2929 | % latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most | ||
2930 | % convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using | ||
2931 | % the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and | ||
2932 | % \scriptscriptstyle). | ||
2933 | % | ||
2934 | \def\LaTeX{% | ||
2935 | L\kern-.36em | ||
2936 | {\setbox0=\hbox{T}% | ||
2937 | \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{% | ||
2938 | \ifx\textnominalsize\xwordpt | ||
2939 | % for 10pt running text, \lllsize (8pt) is too small for the A in LaTeX. | ||
2940 | % Revert to plain's \scriptsize, which is 7pt. | ||
2941 | \count255=\the\fam $\fam\count255 \scriptstyle A$% | ||
2942 | \else | ||
2943 | % For 11pt, we can use our lllsize. | ||
2944 | \selectfonts\lllsize A% | ||
2945 | \fi | ||
2946 | }% | ||
2947 | \vss | ||
2948 | }}% | ||
2949 | \kern-.15em | ||
2950 | \TeX | ||
2951 | } | ||
2952 | |||
2953 | % Some math mode symbols. | ||
2954 | \def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$} | ||
2955 | \def\geq{\ifmmode \ge\else $\ge$\fi} | ||
2956 | \def\leq{\ifmmode \le\else $\le$\fi} | ||
2957 | \def\minus{\ifmmode -\else $-$\fi} | ||
2958 | |||
2959 | % @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font. | ||
2960 | % We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm | ||
2961 | % typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand, | ||
2962 | % in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do | ||
2963 | % whichever is larger. | ||
2964 | % | ||
2965 | \def\dots{% | ||
2966 | \leavevmode | ||
2967 | \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods | ||
2968 | \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em | ||
2969 | \dimen0 = \wd0 | ||
2970 | \else | ||
2971 | \dimen0 = 1.5em | ||
2972 | \fi | ||
2973 | \hbox to \dimen0{% | ||
2974 | \hskip 0pt plus.25fil | ||
2975 | .\hskip 0pt plus1fil | ||
2976 | .\hskip 0pt plus1fil | ||
2977 | .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil | ||
2978 | }% | ||
2979 | } | ||
2980 | |||
2981 | % @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. | ||
2982 | % | ||
2983 | \def\enddots{% | ||
2984 | \dots | ||
2985 | \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor | ||
2986 | } | ||
2987 | |||
2988 | % @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}. | ||
2989 | % | ||
2990 | % Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of | ||
2991 | % \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em. | ||
2992 | % | ||
2993 | \def\point{$\star$} | ||
2994 | \def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}} | ||
2995 | \def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} | ||
2996 | \def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} | ||
2997 | \def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} | ||
2998 | \def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} | ||
2999 | |||
3000 | % The @error{} command. | ||
3001 | % Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit. | ||
3002 | % | ||
3003 | \newbox\errorbox | ||
3004 | % | ||
3005 | {\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box. | ||
3006 | \dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules | ||
3007 | % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.) | ||
3008 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf \putworderror\kern-1.5pt} | ||
3009 | % | ||
3010 | \setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil | ||
3011 | \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right. | ||
3012 | \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules. | ||
3013 | \vbox{% | ||
3014 | \hrule height\dimen2 | ||
3015 | \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text. | ||
3016 | \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below. | ||
3017 | \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right. | ||
3018 | \hrule height\dimen2} | ||
3019 | \hfil} | ||
3020 | % | ||
3021 | \def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox} | ||
3022 | |||
3023 | % @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font. | ||
3024 | % | ||
3025 | \def\pounds{{\it\$}} | ||
3026 | |||
3027 | % @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style. | ||
3028 | % We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik | ||
3029 | % Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and | ||
3030 | % "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need). | ||
3031 | % It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym. | ||
3032 | % | ||
3033 | % Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore | ||
3034 | % that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular | ||
3035 | % font height. | ||
3036 | % | ||
3037 | % feymr - regular | ||
3038 | % feymo - slanted | ||
3039 | % feybr - bold | ||
3040 | % feybo - bold slanted | ||
3041 | % | ||
3042 | % There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge. | ||
3043 | % A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide. | ||
3044 | % Hmm. | ||
3045 | % | ||
3046 | % Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols? | ||
3047 | % Hope not. | ||
3048 | % | ||
3049 | % | ||
3050 | \def\euro{{\eurofont e}} | ||
3051 | \def\eurofont{% | ||
3052 | % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in | ||
3053 | % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that | ||
3054 | % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the | ||
3055 | % font installed. | ||
3056 | % | ||
3057 | % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale | ||
3058 | % that to the current nominal size. | ||
3059 | % | ||
3060 | % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but | ||
3061 | % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts. | ||
3062 | % | ||
3063 | \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% | ||
3064 | % | ||
3065 | \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename | ||
3066 | % bold: | ||
3067 | \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize | ||
3068 | \else | ||
3069 | % regular: | ||
3070 | \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize | ||
3071 | \fi | ||
3072 | \thiseurofont | ||
3073 | } | ||
3074 | |||
3075 | % Glyphs from the EC fonts. We don't use \let for the aliases, because | ||
3076 | % sometimes we redefine the original macro, and the alias should reflect | ||
3077 | % the redefinition. | ||
3078 | % | ||
3079 | % Use LaTeX names for the Icelandic letters. | ||
3080 | \def\DH{{\ecfont \char"D0}} % Eth | ||
3081 | \def\dh{{\ecfont \char"F0}} % eth | ||
3082 | \def\TH{{\ecfont \char"DE}} % Thorn | ||
3083 | \def\th{{\ecfont \char"FE}} % thorn | ||
3084 | % | ||
3085 | \def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}} | ||
3086 | \def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft} | ||
3087 | \def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}} | ||
3088 | \def\guillemotright{\guillemetright} | ||
3089 | \def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}} | ||
3090 | \def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}} | ||
3091 | \def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}} | ||
3092 | \def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}} | ||
3093 | % | ||
3094 | % This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but | ||
3095 | % we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases. We put the | ||
3096 | % tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer | ||
3097 | % dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc. | ||
3098 | % | ||
3099 | % ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using | ||
3100 | % the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in | ||
3101 | % the same EC font. | ||
3102 | \def\ogonek#1{{% | ||
3103 | \def\temp{#1}% | ||
3104 | \ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek | ||
3105 | \else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek | ||
3106 | \else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek | ||
3107 | \else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek | ||
3108 | \else | ||
3109 | \ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}% | ||
3110 | \ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1% | ||
3111 | \else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}% | ||
3112 | \fi | ||
3113 | \fi\fi\fi\fi | ||
3114 | }% | ||
3115 | } | ||
3116 | \def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A} | ||
3117 | \def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a} | ||
3118 | \def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E} | ||
3119 | \def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e} | ||
3120 | % | ||
3121 | % Use the ec* fonts (cm-super in outline format) for non-CM glyphs. | ||
3122 | \def\ecfont{% | ||
3123 | % We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this | ||
3124 | % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German | ||
3125 | % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so | ||
3126 | % hopefully nobody will notice/care. | ||
3127 | \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}% | ||
3128 | \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% | ||
3129 | \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename | ||
3130 | % bold: | ||
3131 | \font\thisecfont = ecb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize | ||
3132 | \else | ||
3133 | % regular: | ||
3134 | \font\thisecfont = ec\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize | ||
3135 | \fi | ||
3136 | \thisecfont | ||
3137 | } | ||
3138 | |||
3139 | % @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really | ||
3140 | % be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now. | ||
3141 | % Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright. | ||
3142 | % | ||
3143 | \def\registeredsymbol{% | ||
3144 | $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}% | ||
3145 | \hfil\crcr\Orb}}% | ||
3146 | }$% | ||
3147 | } | ||
3148 | |||
3149 | % @textdegree - the normal degrees sign. | ||
3150 | % | ||
3151 | \def\textdegree{$^\circ$} | ||
3152 | |||
3153 | % Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with: | ||
3154 | % Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38 | ||
3155 | % so we'll define it if necessary. | ||
3156 | % | ||
3157 | \ifx\Orb\thisisundefined | ||
3158 | \def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D} | ||
3159 | \fi | ||
3160 | |||
3161 | % Quotes. | ||
3162 | \chardef\quotedblleft="5C | ||
3163 | \chardef\quotedblright=`\" | ||
3164 | \chardef\quoteleft=`\` | ||
3165 | \chardef\quoteright=`\' | ||
3166 | |||
3167 | |||
3168 | \message{page headings,} | ||
3169 | |||
3170 | \newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in | ||
3171 | \newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc | ||
3172 | |||
3173 | % First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage. | ||
3174 | \newif\ifseenauthor | ||
3175 | \newif\iffinishedtitlepage | ||
3176 | |||
3177 | % Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the | ||
3178 | % user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage. | ||
3179 | % | ||
3180 | \newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage | ||
3181 | \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue | ||
3182 | \newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage | ||
3183 | \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue | ||
3184 | |||
3185 | \parseargdef\shorttitlepage{% | ||
3186 | \begingroup \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% | ||
3187 | \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} | ||
3188 | |||
3189 | \envdef\titlepage{% | ||
3190 | % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage. | ||
3191 | \begingroup | ||
3192 | \parindent=0pt \textfonts | ||
3193 | % Leave some space at the very top of the page. | ||
3194 | \vglue\titlepagetopglue | ||
3195 | % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. | ||
3196 | \finishedtitlepagetrue | ||
3197 | % | ||
3198 | % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space | ||
3199 | % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second. | ||
3200 | \let\oldpage = \page | ||
3201 | \def\page{% | ||
3202 | \iffinishedtitlepage\else | ||
3203 | \finishtitlepage | ||
3204 | \fi | ||
3205 | \let\page = \oldpage | ||
3206 | \page | ||
3207 | \null | ||
3208 | }% | ||
3209 | } | ||
3210 | |||
3211 | \def\Etitlepage{% | ||
3212 | \iffinishedtitlepage\else | ||
3213 | \finishtitlepage | ||
3214 | \fi | ||
3215 | % It is important to do the page break before ending the group, | ||
3216 | % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group. | ||
3217 | % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page | ||
3218 | % after the title page, which we certainly don't want. | ||
3219 | \oldpage | ||
3220 | \endgroup | ||
3221 | % | ||
3222 | % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are | ||
3223 | % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers. | ||
3224 | \HEADINGSon | ||
3225 | % | ||
3226 | % If they want short, they certainly want long too. | ||
3227 | \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage | ||
3228 | \shortcontents | ||
3229 | \contents | ||
3230 | \global\let\shortcontents = \relax | ||
3231 | \global\let\contents = \relax | ||
3232 | \fi | ||
3233 | % | ||
3234 | \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage | ||
3235 | \contents | ||
3236 | \global\let\contents = \relax | ||
3237 | \global\let\shortcontents = \relax | ||
3238 | \fi | ||
3239 | } | ||
3240 | |||
3241 | \def\finishtitlepage{% | ||
3242 | \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize | ||
3243 | \vskip\titlepagebottomglue | ||
3244 | \finishedtitlepagetrue | ||
3245 | } | ||
3246 | |||
3247 | % Macros to be used within @titlepage: | ||
3248 | |||
3249 | \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm | ||
3250 | \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines} | ||
3251 | |||
3252 | \parseargdef\title{% | ||
3253 | \checkenv\titlepage | ||
3254 | \leftline{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1} | ||
3255 | % print a rule at the page bottom also. | ||
3256 | \finishedtitlepagefalse | ||
3257 | \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt | ||
3258 | } | ||
3259 | |||
3260 | \parseargdef\subtitle{% | ||
3261 | \checkenv\titlepage | ||
3262 | {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}% | ||
3263 | } | ||
3264 | |||
3265 | % @author should come last, but may come many times. | ||
3266 | % It can also be used inside @quotation. | ||
3267 | % | ||
3268 | \parseargdef\author{% | ||
3269 | \def\temp{\quotation}% | ||
3270 | \ifx\thisenv\temp | ||
3271 | \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation. | ||
3272 | \else | ||
3273 | \checkenv\titlepage | ||
3274 | \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi | ||
3275 | {\secfonts\rmisbold \leftline{#1}}% | ||
3276 | \fi | ||
3277 | } | ||
3278 | |||
3279 | |||
3280 | % Set up page headings and footings. | ||
3281 | |||
3282 | \let\thispage=\folio | ||
3283 | |||
3284 | \newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages | ||
3285 | \newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages | ||
3286 | \newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages | ||
3287 | \newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages | ||
3288 | |||
3289 | % Now make TeX use those variables | ||
3290 | \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline | ||
3291 | \else \the\evenheadline \fi}} | ||
3292 | \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline | ||
3293 | \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook} | ||
3294 | \let\HEADINGShook=\relax | ||
3295 | |||
3296 | % Commands to set those variables. | ||
3297 | % For example, this is what @headings on does | ||
3298 | % @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter | ||
3299 | % @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle | ||
3300 | % @evenfooting @thisfile|| | ||
3301 | % @oddfooting ||@thisfile | ||
3302 | |||
3303 | |||
3304 | \def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx} | ||
3305 | \def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} | ||
3306 | \def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% | ||
3307 | \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} | ||
3308 | |||
3309 | \def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx} | ||
3310 | \def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} | ||
3311 | \def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% | ||
3312 | \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} | ||
3313 | |||
3314 | \parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}% | ||
3315 | |||
3316 | \def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx} | ||
3317 | \def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} | ||
3318 | \def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% | ||
3319 | \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} | ||
3320 | |||
3321 | \def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx} | ||
3322 | \def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} | ||
3323 | \def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% | ||
3324 | \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% | ||
3325 | % | ||
3326 | % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume | ||
3327 | % @evenfooting will not be used by itself. | ||
3328 | \global\advance\pageheight by -12pt | ||
3329 | \global\advance\vsize by -12pt | ||
3330 | } | ||
3331 | |||
3332 | \parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}} | ||
3333 | |||
3334 | % @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page | ||
3335 | % @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page | ||
3336 | % | ||
3337 | % The same set of arguments for: | ||
3338 | % | ||
3339 | % @oddheadingmarks | ||
3340 | % @evenfootingmarks | ||
3341 | % @oddfootingmarks | ||
3342 | % @everyheadingmarks | ||
3343 | % @everyfootingmarks | ||
3344 | |||
3345 | \def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}} | ||
3346 | \def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}} | ||
3347 | \def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}} | ||
3348 | \def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}} | ||
3349 | \def\everyheadingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1} | ||
3350 | \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} } | ||
3351 | \def\everyfootingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1} | ||
3352 | \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} } | ||
3353 | % #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom. | ||
3354 | \def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {% | ||
3355 | \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname | ||
3356 | \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp | ||
3357 | } | ||
3358 | |||
3359 | \everyheadingmarks bottom | ||
3360 | \everyfootingmarks bottom | ||
3361 | |||
3362 | % @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing. | ||
3363 | % @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing. | ||
3364 | % @headings off turns them off. | ||
3365 | % @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility. | ||
3366 | % @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page. | ||
3367 | % @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page. | ||
3368 | % @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page. | ||
3369 | % By default, they are off at the start of a document, | ||
3370 | % and turned `on' after @end titlepage. | ||
3371 | |||
3372 | \def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} | ||
3373 | |||
3374 | \def\headingsoff{% non-global headings elimination | ||
3375 | \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}% | ||
3376 | \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}% | ||
3377 | } | ||
3378 | |||
3379 | \def\HEADINGSoff{{\globaldefs=1 \headingsoff}} % global setting | ||
3380 | \HEADINGSoff % it's the default | ||
3381 | |||
3382 | % When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1. | ||
3383 | % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner, | ||
3384 | % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document | ||
3385 | % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top | ||
3386 | % edge of all pages. | ||
3387 | \def\HEADINGSdouble{% | ||
3388 | \global\pageno=1 | ||
3389 | \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | ||
3390 | \global\oddfootline={\hfil} | ||
3391 | \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} | ||
3392 | \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | ||
3393 | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage | ||
3394 | } | ||
3395 | \let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | ||
3396 | |||
3397 | % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page, | ||
3398 | % page number on top right. | ||
3399 | \def\HEADINGSsingle{% | ||
3400 | \global\pageno=1 | ||
3401 | \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | ||
3402 | \global\oddfootline={\hfil} | ||
3403 | \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | ||
3404 | \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | ||
3405 | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | ||
3406 | } | ||
3407 | \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} | ||
3408 | |||
3409 | \def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex} | ||
3410 | \let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter | ||
3411 | \def\HEADINGSdoublex{% | ||
3412 | \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | ||
3413 | \global\oddfootline={\hfil} | ||
3414 | \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} | ||
3415 | \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | ||
3416 | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage | ||
3417 | } | ||
3418 | |||
3419 | \def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex} | ||
3420 | \def\HEADINGSsinglex{% | ||
3421 | \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | ||
3422 | \global\oddfootline={\hfil} | ||
3423 | \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | ||
3424 | \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | ||
3425 | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | ||
3426 | } | ||
3427 | |||
3428 | % Subroutines used in generating headings | ||
3429 | % This produces Day Month Year style of output. | ||
3430 | % Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set | ||
3431 | % up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this). | ||
3432 | \ifx\today\thisisundefined | ||
3433 | \def\today{% | ||
3434 | \number\day\space | ||
3435 | \ifcase\month | ||
3436 | \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr | ||
3437 | \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug | ||
3438 | \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec | ||
3439 | \fi | ||
3440 | \space\number\year} | ||
3441 | \fi | ||
3442 | |||
3443 | % @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings. | ||
3444 | % It generates no output of its own. | ||
3445 | \def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle} | ||
3446 | \def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}} | ||
3447 | |||
3448 | |||
3449 | \message{tables,} | ||
3450 | % Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x). | ||
3451 | |||
3452 | % default indentation of table text | ||
3453 | \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in | ||
3454 | % default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text | ||
3455 | \newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in | ||
3456 | % margin between end of table item and start of table text. | ||
3457 | \newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in | ||
3458 | |||
3459 | % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin | ||
3460 | \newdimen\itemmax | ||
3461 | |||
3462 | % Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with | ||
3463 | % these defs. | ||
3464 | % They also define \itemindex | ||
3465 | % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none). | ||
3466 | |||
3467 | \newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip | ||
3468 | |||
3469 | \def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi} | ||
3470 | |||
3471 | \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} | ||
3472 | \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} | ||
3473 | |||
3474 | \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup % | ||
3475 | \advance\hsize by -\rightskip | ||
3476 | \advance\hsize by -\tableindent | ||
3477 | \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}% | ||
3478 | \itemindex{#1}% | ||
3479 | \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. | ||
3480 | % | ||
3481 | % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line | ||
3482 | % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that | ||
3483 | % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next | ||
3484 | % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the | ||
3485 | % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space. | ||
3486 | \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax | ||
3487 | % | ||
3488 | % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping, | ||
3489 | % but leave it ragged-right. | ||
3490 | \begingroup | ||
3491 | \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent | ||
3492 | \advance\hsize by\tableindent | ||
3493 | \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil\relax | ||
3494 | \leavevmode\unhbox0\par | ||
3495 | \endgroup | ||
3496 | % | ||
3497 | % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the | ||
3498 | % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started. | ||
3499 | \nobreak \vskip-\parskip | ||
3500 | % | ||
3501 | % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if | ||
3502 | % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no | ||
3503 | % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would | ||
3504 | % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this | ||
3505 | % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert | ||
3506 | % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also. | ||
3507 | % | ||
3508 | \penalty 10001 | ||
3509 | \endgroup | ||
3510 | \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse | ||
3511 | \else | ||
3512 | % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the | ||
3513 | % following text (if any) will end up on the same line. | ||
3514 | \noindent | ||
3515 | % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in | ||
3516 | % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and | ||
3517 | % eventually be printed. | ||
3518 | \nobreak\kern-\tableindent | ||
3519 | \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 | ||
3520 | \unhbox0 | ||
3521 | \nobreak\kern\dimen0 | ||
3522 | \endgroup | ||
3523 | \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue | ||
3524 | \fi | ||
3525 | } | ||
3526 | |||
3527 | \def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}} | ||
3528 | \def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}} | ||
3529 | |||
3530 | % @table, @ftable, @vtable. | ||
3531 | \envdef\table{% | ||
3532 | \let\itemindex\gobble | ||
3533 | \tablecheck{table}% | ||
3534 | } | ||
3535 | \envdef\ftable{% | ||
3536 | \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}% | ||
3537 | \tablecheck{ftable}% | ||
3538 | } | ||
3539 | \envdef\vtable{% | ||
3540 | \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}% | ||
3541 | \tablecheck{vtable}% | ||
3542 | } | ||
3543 | \def\tablecheck#1{% | ||
3544 | \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active | ||
3545 | \endgroup | ||
3546 | \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is | ||
3547 | that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}% | ||
3548 | \def\next{\doignore{#1}}% | ||
3549 | \else | ||
3550 | \let\next\tablex | ||
3551 | \fi | ||
3552 | \next | ||
3553 | } | ||
3554 | \def\tablex#1{% | ||
3555 | \def\itemindicate{#1}% | ||
3556 | \parsearg\tabley | ||
3557 | } | ||
3558 | \def\tabley#1{% | ||
3559 | {% | ||
3560 | \makevalueexpandable | ||
3561 | \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}% | ||
3562 | \expandafter | ||
3563 | }\temp \endtablez | ||
3564 | } | ||
3565 | \def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{% | ||
3566 | \aboveenvbreak | ||
3567 | \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi | ||
3568 | \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi | ||
3569 | \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi | ||
3570 | \itemmax=\tableindent | ||
3571 | \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin | ||
3572 | \advance \leftskip by \tableindent | ||
3573 | \exdentamount=\tableindent | ||
3574 | \parindent = 0pt | ||
3575 | \parskip = \smallskipamount | ||
3576 | \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi | ||
3577 | \let\item = \internalBitem | ||
3578 | \let\itemx = \internalBitemx | ||
3579 | } | ||
3580 | \def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak} | ||
3581 | \let\Eftable\Etable | ||
3582 | \let\Evtable\Etable | ||
3583 | \let\Eitemize\Etable | ||
3584 | \let\Eenumerate\Etable | ||
3585 | |||
3586 | % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize | ||
3587 | |||
3588 | \newcount \itemno | ||
3589 | |||
3590 | \envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize} | ||
3591 | |||
3592 | \def\doitemize#1{% | ||
3593 | \aboveenvbreak | ||
3594 | \itemmax=\itemindent | ||
3595 | \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin | ||
3596 | \advance\leftskip by \itemindent | ||
3597 | \exdentamount=\itemindent | ||
3598 | \parindent=0pt | ||
3599 | \parskip=\smallskipamount | ||
3600 | \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi | ||
3601 | % | ||
3602 | % Try typesetting the item mark that if the document erroneously says | ||
3603 | % something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error | ||
3604 | % right away at the @itemize. It's not the best error message in the | ||
3605 | % world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item. This means if | ||
3606 | % the user wants an empty mark, they have to say @w{} not just @w. | ||
3607 | \def\itemcontents{#1}% | ||
3608 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\itemcontents}% | ||
3609 | % | ||
3610 | % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet. | ||
3611 | \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi | ||
3612 | % | ||
3613 | \let\item=\itemizeitem | ||
3614 | } | ||
3615 | |||
3616 | % Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate. | ||
3617 | % | ||
3618 | \def\itemizeitem{% | ||
3619 | \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations | ||
3620 | {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break | ||
3621 | {% | ||
3622 | % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a | ||
3623 | % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have | ||
3624 | % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero | ||
3625 | % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the | ||
3626 | % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there | ||
3627 | % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much | ||
3628 | % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least | ||
3629 | % that's the theory. | ||
3630 | \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi | ||
3631 | \noindent | ||
3632 | \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}% | ||
3633 | % | ||
3634 | \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item. | ||
3635 | \flushcr | ||
3636 | } | ||
3637 | |||
3638 | % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in | ||
3639 | % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder. | ||
3640 | % | ||
3641 | \def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}% | ||
3642 | |||
3643 | % Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter, | ||
3644 | % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No | ||
3645 | % argument is the same as `1'. | ||
3646 | % | ||
3647 | \envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey} | ||
3648 | \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{% | ||
3649 | % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'. | ||
3650 | \def\thearg{#1}% | ||
3651 | \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi | ||
3652 | % | ||
3653 | % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a | ||
3654 | % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number. | ||
3655 | % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made. | ||
3656 | % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at | ||
3657 | % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.) | ||
3658 | \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark | ||
3659 | \ifx\rest\empty | ||
3660 | % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything. | ||
3661 | % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero. | ||
3662 | % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and | ||
3663 | % not equal to itself. | ||
3664 | % Otherwise, we assume it's a number. | ||
3665 | % | ||
3666 | % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from | ||
3667 | % continuing to look for a <number>. | ||
3668 | % | ||
3669 | \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax | ||
3670 | \numericenumerate % a number (we hope) | ||
3671 | \else | ||
3672 | % It's a letter. | ||
3673 | \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax | ||
3674 | \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter | ||
3675 | \else | ||
3676 | \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter | ||
3677 | \fi | ||
3678 | \fi | ||
3679 | \else | ||
3680 | % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number. | ||
3681 | \numericenumerate | ||
3682 | \fi | ||
3683 | } | ||
3684 | |||
3685 | % An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is | ||
3686 | % given in \thearg. | ||
3687 | % | ||
3688 | \def\numericenumerate{% | ||
3689 | \itemno = \thearg | ||
3690 | \startenumeration{\the\itemno}% | ||
3691 | } | ||
3692 | |||
3693 | % The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg. | ||
3694 | \def\lowercaseenumerate{% | ||
3695 | \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg | ||
3696 | \startenumeration{% | ||
3697 | % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. | ||
3698 | \ifnum\itemno=0 | ||
3699 | \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger | ||
3700 | alphabet}% | ||
3701 | \fi | ||
3702 | \char\lccode\itemno | ||
3703 | }% | ||
3704 | } | ||
3705 | |||
3706 | % The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg. | ||
3707 | \def\uppercaseenumerate{% | ||
3708 | \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg | ||
3709 | \startenumeration{% | ||
3710 | % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. | ||
3711 | \ifnum\itemno=0 | ||
3712 | \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger | ||
3713 | alphabet} | ||
3714 | \fi | ||
3715 | \char\uccode\itemno | ||
3716 | }% | ||
3717 | } | ||
3718 | |||
3719 | % Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the | ||
3720 | % common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in | ||
3721 | % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno. | ||
3722 | % | ||
3723 | \def\startenumeration#1{% | ||
3724 | \advance\itemno by -1 | ||
3725 | \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr | ||
3726 | } | ||
3727 | |||
3728 | % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg | ||
3729 | % to @enumerate. | ||
3730 | % | ||
3731 | \def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}} | ||
3732 | \def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}} | ||
3733 | \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate} | ||
3734 | \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate} | ||
3735 | |||
3736 | |||
3737 | % @multitable macros | ||
3738 | % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96 | ||
3739 | % | ||
3740 | % @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired. | ||
3741 | % Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width | ||
3742 | % can be specified either with sample text given in a template line, | ||
3743 | % or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page. | ||
3744 | |||
3745 | % Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines. | ||
3746 | |||
3747 | % To make preamble: | ||
3748 | % | ||
3749 | % Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize: | ||
3750 | % @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45 | ||
3751 | % @item ... | ||
3752 | % | ||
3753 | % Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total | ||
3754 | % current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many | ||
3755 | % columns as desired. | ||
3756 | |||
3757 | |||
3758 | % Or use a template: | ||
3759 | % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} | ||
3760 | % @item ... | ||
3761 | % using the widest term desired in each column. | ||
3762 | |||
3763 | % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column | ||
3764 | % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's | ||
3765 | % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed, | ||
3766 | % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns. | ||
3767 | |||
3768 | % @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt | ||
3769 | % if they are. | ||
3770 | |||
3771 | % Sample multitable: | ||
3772 | |||
3773 | % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} | ||
3774 | % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col | ||
3775 | % @item | ||
3776 | % first col stuff | ||
3777 | % @tab | ||
3778 | % second col stuff | ||
3779 | % @tab | ||
3780 | % third col | ||
3781 | % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff | ||
3782 | % @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column. | ||
3783 | % | ||
3784 | % They will wrap at the width determined by the template. | ||
3785 | % @item@tab@tab This will be in third column. | ||
3786 | % @end multitable | ||
3787 | |||
3788 | % Default dimensions may be reset by user. | ||
3789 | % @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table. | ||
3790 | % @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table. | ||
3791 | % @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns. | ||
3792 | % @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline | ||
3793 | % to baseline. | ||
3794 | % 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing. | ||
3795 | % | ||
3796 | \newskip\multitableparskip | ||
3797 | \newskip\multitableparindent | ||
3798 | \newdimen\multitablecolspace | ||
3799 | \newskip\multitablelinespace | ||
3800 | \multitableparskip=0pt | ||
3801 | \multitableparindent=6pt | ||
3802 | \multitablecolspace=12pt | ||
3803 | \multitablelinespace=0pt | ||
3804 | |||
3805 | % Macros used to set up halign preamble: | ||
3806 | % | ||
3807 | \let\endsetuptable\relax | ||
3808 | \def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} | ||
3809 | \let\columnfractions\relax | ||
3810 | \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions} | ||
3811 | \newif\ifsetpercent | ||
3812 | |||
3813 | % #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might | ||
3814 | % be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is. | ||
3815 | % | ||
3816 | \def\pickupwholefraction#1 {% | ||
3817 | \global\advance\colcount by 1 | ||
3818 | \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}% | ||
3819 | \setuptable | ||
3820 | } | ||
3821 | |||
3822 | \newcount\colcount | ||
3823 | \def\setuptable#1{% | ||
3824 | \def\firstarg{#1}% | ||
3825 | \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable | ||
3826 | \let\go = \relax | ||
3827 | \else | ||
3828 | \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions | ||
3829 | \global\setpercenttrue | ||
3830 | \else | ||
3831 | \ifsetpercent | ||
3832 | \let\go\pickupwholefraction | ||
3833 | \else | ||
3834 | \global\advance\colcount by 1 | ||
3835 | \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a | ||
3836 | % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway. | ||
3837 | \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% | ||
3838 | \fi | ||
3839 | \fi | ||
3840 | \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction | ||
3841 | % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so | ||
3842 | % we'll always have a period there to be parsed. | ||
3843 | \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}% | ||
3844 | \else | ||
3845 | \let\go = \setuptable | ||
3846 | \fi% | ||
3847 | \fi | ||
3848 | \go | ||
3849 | } | ||
3850 | |||
3851 | % multitable-only commands. | ||
3852 | % | ||
3853 | % @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold. | ||
3854 | % Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group | ||
3855 | % of an alignment entry. \everycr resets \everytab so we don't have to | ||
3856 | % undo it ourselves. | ||
3857 | \def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable | ||
3858 | \def\headitem{% | ||
3859 | \checkenv\multitable | ||
3860 | \crcr | ||
3861 | \global\everytab={\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs | ||
3862 | \the\everytab % for the first item | ||
3863 | }% | ||
3864 | % | ||
3865 | % A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template | ||
3866 | % line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until | ||
3867 | % we again encounter the problem the 1sp was intended to solve. | ||
3868 | % --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99. | ||
3869 | \def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}% | ||
3870 | |||
3871 | % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions: | ||
3872 | % | ||
3873 | \newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab. | ||
3874 | % | ||
3875 | \envdef\multitable{% | ||
3876 | \vskip\parskip | ||
3877 | \startsavinginserts | ||
3878 | % | ||
3879 | % @item within a multitable starts a normal row. | ||
3880 | % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries | ||
3881 | % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka | ||
3882 | % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize. | ||
3883 | \def\item{\crcr}% | ||
3884 | % | ||
3885 | \tolerance=9500 | ||
3886 | \hbadness=9500 | ||
3887 | \setmultitablespacing | ||
3888 | \parskip=\multitableparskip | ||
3889 | \parindent=\multitableparindent | ||
3890 | \overfullrule=0pt | ||
3891 | \global\colcount=0 | ||
3892 | % | ||
3893 | \everycr = {% | ||
3894 | \noalign{% | ||
3895 | \global\everytab={}% | ||
3896 | \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter. | ||
3897 | % Check for saved footnotes, etc. | ||
3898 | \checkinserts | ||
3899 | % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages. | ||
3900 | %\filbreak | ||
3901 | % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the | ||
3902 | % table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the | ||
3903 | % problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl. | ||
3904 | }% | ||
3905 | }% | ||
3906 | % | ||
3907 | \parsearg\domultitable | ||
3908 | } | ||
3909 | \def\domultitable#1{% | ||
3910 | % To parse everything between @multitable and @item: | ||
3911 | \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable | ||
3912 | % | ||
3913 | % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will | ||
3914 | % be used as many times as user calls for columns. | ||
3915 | % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and | ||
3916 | % continue for many paragraphs if desired. | ||
3917 | \halign\bgroup &% | ||
3918 | \global\advance\colcount by 1 | ||
3919 | \multistrut | ||
3920 | \vtop{% | ||
3921 | % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width: | ||
3922 | \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname | ||
3923 | % | ||
3924 | % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other | ||
3925 | % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after | ||
3926 | % the first one. | ||
3927 | % | ||
3928 | % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace | ||
3929 | % to the width of each template entry. | ||
3930 | % | ||
3931 | % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will | ||
3932 | % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip | ||
3933 | % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at | ||
3934 | % left margin and final column will justify at right margin. | ||
3935 | % | ||
3936 | % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment. | ||
3937 | \rightskip=0pt | ||
3938 | \ifnum\colcount=1 | ||
3939 | % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text. | ||
3940 | \advance\hsize by\leftskip | ||
3941 | \else | ||
3942 | \ifsetpercent \else | ||
3943 | % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize | ||
3944 | % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace. | ||
3945 | \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace | ||
3946 | \fi | ||
3947 | % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace: | ||
3948 | \leftskip=\multitablecolspace | ||
3949 | \fi | ||
3950 | % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious | ||
3951 | % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the | ||
3952 | % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself. | ||
3953 | % For example: | ||
3954 | % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89 | ||
3955 | % @item @code{#} | ||
3956 | % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country. | ||
3957 | % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively | ||
3958 | % marking characters. | ||
3959 | \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut | ||
3960 | }\cr | ||
3961 | } | ||
3962 | \def\Emultitable{% | ||
3963 | \crcr | ||
3964 | \egroup % end the \halign | ||
3965 | \global\setpercentfalse | ||
3966 | } | ||
3967 | |||
3968 | \def\setmultitablespacing{% | ||
3969 | \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing | ||
3970 | % | ||
3971 | % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in | ||
3972 | % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on | ||
3973 | % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off. | ||
3974 | % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100. | ||
3975 | \ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt | ||
3976 | \setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip | ||
3977 | \global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0 | ||
3978 | \fi | ||
3979 | % Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of | ||
3980 | % table. If not, do nothing. | ||
3981 | % If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace. | ||
3982 | \ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace | ||
3983 | \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace | ||
3984 | \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller | ||
3985 | % than skip between lines in the table. | ||
3986 | \fi% | ||
3987 | \ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt | ||
3988 | \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace | ||
3989 | \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller | ||
3990 | % than skip between lines in the table. | ||
3991 | \fi} | ||
3992 | |||
3993 | |||
3994 | \message{conditionals,} | ||
3995 | |||
3996 | % @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext, | ||
3997 | % @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't | ||
3998 | % attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we | ||
3999 | % have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't | ||
4000 | % attempt to close an environment group. | ||
4001 | % | ||
4002 | \def\makecond#1{% | ||
4003 | \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax | ||
4004 | \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1 | ||
4005 | } | ||
4006 | \makecond{iftex} | ||
4007 | \makecond{ifnotdocbook} | ||
4008 | \makecond{ifnothtml} | ||
4009 | \makecond{ifnotinfo} | ||
4010 | \makecond{ifnotplaintext} | ||
4011 | \makecond{ifnotxml} | ||
4012 | |||
4013 | % Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like. | ||
4014 | % | ||
4015 | \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} | ||
4016 | \def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}} | ||
4017 | \def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}} | ||
4018 | \def\html{\doignore{html}} | ||
4019 | \def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}} | ||
4020 | \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} | ||
4021 | \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} | ||
4022 | \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}} | ||
4023 | \def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}} | ||
4024 | \def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}} | ||
4025 | \def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} | ||
4026 | \def\menu{\doignore{menu}} | ||
4027 | \def\xml{\doignore{xml}} | ||
4028 | |||
4029 | % Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals. | ||
4030 | % | ||
4031 | % A count to remember the depth of nesting. | ||
4032 | \newcount\doignorecount | ||
4033 | |||
4034 | \def\doignore#1{\begingroup | ||
4035 | % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode: | ||
4036 | \obeylines | ||
4037 | \catcode`\@ = \other | ||
4038 | \catcode`\{ = \other | ||
4039 | \catcode`\} = \other | ||
4040 | % | ||
4041 | % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. | ||
4042 | \spaceisspace | ||
4043 | % | ||
4044 | % Count number of #1's that we've seen. | ||
4045 | \doignorecount = 0 | ||
4046 | % | ||
4047 | % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'. | ||
4048 | \dodoignore{#1}% | ||
4049 | } | ||
4050 | |||
4051 | { \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source. | ||
4052 | \obeylines % | ||
4053 | % | ||
4054 | \gdef\dodoignore#1{% | ||
4055 | % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'. | ||
4056 | % | ||
4057 | % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'. | ||
4058 | \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{% | ||
4059 | \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}% | ||
4060 | % | ||
4061 | % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a | ||
4062 | % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for | ||
4063 | % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.) | ||
4064 | \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}% | ||
4065 | % | ||
4066 | % And now expand that command. | ||
4067 | \doignoretext ^^M% | ||
4068 | }% | ||
4069 | } | ||
4070 | |||
4071 | \def\doignoreyyy#1{% | ||
4072 | \def\temp{#1}% | ||
4073 | \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found. | ||
4074 | \let\next\doignoretextzzz | ||
4075 | \else % Found a nested condition, ... | ||
4076 | \advance\doignorecount by 1 | ||
4077 | \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another. | ||
4078 | % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example). | ||
4079 | \fi | ||
4080 | \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro. | ||
4081 | } | ||
4082 | |||
4083 | % We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_". | ||
4084 | % | ||
4085 | \def\doignoretextzzz#1{% | ||
4086 | \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end. | ||
4087 | \let\next\enddoignore | ||
4088 | \else % Still inside a nested condition. | ||
4089 | \advance\doignorecount by -1 | ||
4090 | \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end. | ||
4091 | \fi | ||
4092 | \next | ||
4093 | } | ||
4094 | |||
4095 | % Finish off ignored text. | ||
4096 | { \obeylines% | ||
4097 | % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim | ||
4098 | % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional | ||
4099 | % would result in a blank line in the output. | ||
4100 | \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}% | ||
4101 | } | ||
4102 | |||
4103 | |||
4104 | % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. | ||
4105 | % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE. | ||
4106 | % | ||
4107 | % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be | ||
4108 | % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our | ||
4109 | % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we | ||
4110 | % didn't need it. | ||
4111 | % We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10. | ||
4112 | % | ||
4113 | \parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} | ||
4114 | \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% | ||
4115 | {% | ||
4116 | \makevalueexpandable | ||
4117 | \def\temp{#2}% | ||
4118 | \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}% | ||
4119 | \ifx\temp\empty | ||
4120 | \next{}% | ||
4121 | \else | ||
4122 | \setzzz#2\endsetzzz | ||
4123 | \fi | ||
4124 | }% | ||
4125 | } | ||
4126 | % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. | ||
4127 | \def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}} | ||
4128 | |||
4129 | % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. | ||
4130 | % | ||
4131 | \parseargdef\clear{% | ||
4132 | {% | ||
4133 | \makevalueexpandable | ||
4134 | \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax | ||
4135 | }% | ||
4136 | } | ||
4137 | |||
4138 | % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. | ||
4139 | \def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx} | ||
4140 | \def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup} | ||
4141 | { | ||
4142 | \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active | ||
4143 | % | ||
4144 | \gdef\makevalueexpandable{% | ||
4145 | \let\value = \expandablevalue | ||
4146 | % We don't want these characters active, ... | ||
4147 | \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other | ||
4148 | % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if | ||
4149 | % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though. | ||
4150 | % So \let them to their normal equivalents. | ||
4151 | \let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore | ||
4152 | } | ||
4153 | } | ||
4154 | |||
4155 | % We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's | ||
4156 | % properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies). | ||
4157 | % The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since | ||
4158 | % the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the | ||
4159 | % variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain | ||
4160 | % it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work | ||
4161 | % to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete). | ||
4162 | % | ||
4163 | \def\expandablevalue#1{% | ||
4164 | \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax | ||
4165 | {[No value for ``#1'']}% | ||
4166 | \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}% | ||
4167 | \else | ||
4168 | \csname SET#1\endcsname | ||
4169 | \fi | ||
4170 | } | ||
4171 | |||
4172 | % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined | ||
4173 | % with @set. | ||
4174 | % | ||
4175 | % To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine. | ||
4176 | % | ||
4177 | \makecond{ifset} | ||
4178 | \def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}} | ||
4179 | \def\doifset#1#2{% | ||
4180 | {% | ||
4181 | \makevalueexpandable | ||
4182 | \let\next=\empty | ||
4183 | \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax | ||
4184 | #1% If not set, redefine \next. | ||
4185 | \fi | ||
4186 | \expandafter | ||
4187 | }\next | ||
4188 | } | ||
4189 | \def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}} | ||
4190 | |||
4191 | % @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been | ||
4192 | % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. | ||
4193 | % | ||
4194 | % The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the | ||
4195 | % above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set, | ||
4196 | % then redefine \next to \ifclearfail. | ||
4197 | % | ||
4198 | \makecond{ifclear} | ||
4199 | \def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}} | ||
4200 | \def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}} | ||
4201 | |||
4202 | % @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file | ||
4203 | % which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX. | ||
4204 | \let\dircategory=\comment | ||
4205 | |||
4206 | % @defininfoenclose. | ||
4207 | \let\definfoenclose=\comment | ||
4208 | |||
4209 | |||
4210 | \message{indexing,} | ||
4211 | % Index generation facilities | ||
4212 | |||
4213 | % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite | ||
4214 | % except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's. | ||
4215 | \edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}} | ||
4216 | |||
4217 | % \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo. | ||
4218 | % It automatically defines \fooindex such that | ||
4219 | % \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo. | ||
4220 | % It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for | ||
4221 | % the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo. | ||
4222 | % The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long | ||
4223 | % for the sake of vms. | ||
4224 | % | ||
4225 | \def\newindex#1{% | ||
4226 | \iflinks | ||
4227 | \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname | ||
4228 | \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file | ||
4229 | \fi | ||
4230 | \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index | ||
4231 | \noexpand\doindex{#1}} | ||
4232 | } | ||
4233 | |||
4234 | % @defindex foo == \newindex{foo} | ||
4235 | % | ||
4236 | \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex} | ||
4237 | |||
4238 | % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. | ||
4239 | % | ||
4240 | \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} | ||
4241 | % | ||
4242 | \def\newcodeindex#1{% | ||
4243 | \iflinks | ||
4244 | \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname | ||
4245 | \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 | ||
4246 | \fi | ||
4247 | \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% | ||
4248 | \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}% | ||
4249 | } | ||
4250 | |||
4251 | |||
4252 | % @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar. | ||
4253 | % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. | ||
4254 | % | ||
4255 | % @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo | ||
4256 | % inside @code. | ||
4257 | % | ||
4258 | \def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}} | ||
4259 | \def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}} | ||
4260 | |||
4261 | % #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo), | ||
4262 | % #3 the target index (bar). | ||
4263 | \def\dosynindex#1#2#3{% | ||
4264 | % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up | ||
4265 | % closing the target index. | ||
4266 | \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \relax | ||
4267 | % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the | ||
4268 | % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files. | ||
4269 | \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname | ||
4270 | \expandafter\let\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1 | ||
4271 | \fi | ||
4272 | % redefine \fooindfile: | ||
4273 | \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname | ||
4274 | \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp | ||
4275 | % redefine \fooindex: | ||
4276 | \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}% | ||
4277 | } | ||
4278 | |||
4279 | % Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros. | ||
4280 | % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro, | ||
4281 | % and it is "foo", the name of the index. | ||
4282 | |||
4283 | % \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work. | ||
4284 | % This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros. | ||
4285 | |||
4286 | % There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic} | ||
4287 | % which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index. | ||
4288 | |||
4289 | \def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer} | ||
4290 | \def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}} | ||
4291 | |||
4292 | % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument. | ||
4293 | \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer} | ||
4294 | \def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} | ||
4295 | |||
4296 | % Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry. | ||
4297 | % Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't, | ||
4298 | % we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't. | ||
4299 | % | ||
4300 | \def\indexdummies{% | ||
4301 | \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files. | ||
4302 | \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files. | ||
4303 | \def\ {\realbackslash\space }% | ||
4304 | % | ||
4305 | % Need these unexpandable (because we define \tt as a dummy) | ||
4306 | % definitions when @{ or @} appear in index entry text. Also, more | ||
4307 | % complicated, when \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again. | ||
4308 | % We can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes | ||
4309 | % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters. Perhaps we | ||
4310 | % should define @lbrace and @rbrace commands a la @comma. | ||
4311 | \def\{{{\tt\char123}}% | ||
4312 | \def\}{{\tt\char125}}% | ||
4313 | % | ||
4314 | % I don't entirely understand this, but when an index entry is | ||
4315 | % generated from a macro call, the \endinput which \scanmacro inserts | ||
4316 | % causes processing to be prematurely terminated. This is, | ||
4317 | % apparently, because \indexsorttmp is fully expanded, and \endinput | ||
4318 | % is an expandable command. The redefinition below makes \endinput | ||
4319 | % disappear altogether for that purpose -- although logging shows that | ||
4320 | % processing continues to some further point. On the other hand, it | ||
4321 | % seems \endinput does not hurt in the printed index arg, since that | ||
4322 | % is still getting written without apparent harm. | ||
4323 | % | ||
4324 | % Sample source (mac-idx3.tex, reported by Graham Percival to | ||
4325 | % help-texinfo, 22may06): | ||
4326 | % @macro funindex {WORD} | ||
4327 | % @findex xyz | ||
4328 | % @end macro | ||
4329 | % ... | ||
4330 | % @funindex commtest | ||
4331 | % | ||
4332 | % The above is not enough to reproduce the bug, but it gives the flavor. | ||
4333 | % | ||
4334 | % Sample whatsit resulting: | ||
4335 | % .@write3{\entry{xyz}{@folio }{@code {xyz@endinput }}} | ||
4336 | % | ||
4337 | % So: | ||
4338 | \let\endinput = \empty | ||
4339 | % | ||
4340 | % Do the redefinitions. | ||
4341 | \commondummies | ||
4342 | } | ||
4343 | |||
4344 | % For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character. So we want to | ||
4345 | % redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of | ||
4346 | % \realbackslash, still used for index files). When everything uses @, | ||
4347 | % this will be simpler. | ||
4348 | % | ||
4349 | \def\atdummies{% | ||
4350 | \def\@{@@}% | ||
4351 | \def\ {@ }% | ||
4352 | \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd | ||
4353 | \let\} = \rbraceatcmd | ||
4354 | % | ||
4355 | % Do the redefinitions. | ||
4356 | \commondummies | ||
4357 | \otherbackslash | ||
4358 | } | ||
4359 | |||
4360 | % Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies. | ||
4361 | % | ||
4362 | \def\commondummies{% | ||
4363 | % | ||
4364 | % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively | ||
4365 | % preventing its expansion. This is used only for control words, | ||
4366 | % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for | ||
4367 | % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word | ||
4368 | % from whatever follows. | ||
4369 | % | ||
4370 | % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the | ||
4371 | % space. | ||
4372 | % | ||
4373 | % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and | ||
4374 | % those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then | ||
4375 | % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever). | ||
4376 | % | ||
4377 | \def\definedummyword ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}% | ||
4378 | \def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}% | ||
4379 | \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter | ||
4380 | % | ||
4381 | \commondummiesnofonts | ||
4382 | % | ||
4383 | \definedummyletter\_% | ||
4384 | \definedummyletter\-% | ||
4385 | % | ||
4386 | % Non-English letters. | ||
4387 | \definedummyword\AA | ||
4388 | \definedummyword\AE | ||
4389 | \definedummyword\DH | ||
4390 | \definedummyword\L | ||
4391 | \definedummyword\O | ||
4392 | \definedummyword\OE | ||
4393 | \definedummyword\TH | ||
4394 | \definedummyword\aa | ||
4395 | \definedummyword\ae | ||
4396 | \definedummyword\dh | ||
4397 | \definedummyword\exclamdown | ||
4398 | \definedummyword\l | ||
4399 | \definedummyword\o | ||
4400 | \definedummyword\oe | ||
4401 | \definedummyword\ordf | ||
4402 | \definedummyword\ordm | ||
4403 | \definedummyword\questiondown | ||
4404 | \definedummyword\ss | ||
4405 | \definedummyword\th | ||
4406 | % | ||
4407 | % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do. | ||
4408 | \definedummyword\bf | ||
4409 | \definedummyword\gtr | ||
4410 | \definedummyword\hat | ||
4411 | \definedummyword\less | ||
4412 | \definedummyword\sf | ||
4413 | \definedummyword\sl | ||
4414 | \definedummyword\tclose | ||
4415 | \definedummyword\tt | ||
4416 | % | ||
4417 | \definedummyword\LaTeX | ||
4418 | \definedummyword\TeX | ||
4419 | % | ||
4420 | % Assorted special characters. | ||
4421 | \definedummyword\arrow | ||
4422 | \definedummyword\bullet | ||
4423 | \definedummyword\comma | ||
4424 | \definedummyword\copyright | ||
4425 | \definedummyword\registeredsymbol | ||
4426 | \definedummyword\dots | ||
4427 | \definedummyword\enddots | ||
4428 | \definedummyword\entrybreak | ||
4429 | \definedummyword\equiv | ||
4430 | \definedummyword\error | ||
4431 | \definedummyword\euro | ||
4432 | \definedummyword\expansion | ||
4433 | \definedummyword\geq | ||
4434 | \definedummyword\guillemetleft | ||
4435 | \definedummyword\guillemetright | ||
4436 | \definedummyword\guilsinglleft | ||
4437 | \definedummyword\guilsinglright | ||
4438 | \definedummyword\leq | ||
4439 | \definedummyword\minus | ||
4440 | \definedummyword\ogonek | ||
4441 | \definedummyword\pounds | ||
4442 | \definedummyword\point | ||
4443 | \definedummyword\print | ||
4444 | \definedummyword\quotedblbase | ||
4445 | \definedummyword\quotedblleft | ||
4446 | \definedummyword\quotedblright | ||
4447 | \definedummyword\quoteleft | ||
4448 | \definedummyword\quoteright | ||
4449 | \definedummyword\quotesinglbase | ||
4450 | \definedummyword\result | ||
4451 | \definedummyword\textdegree | ||
4452 | % | ||
4453 | % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write. | ||
4454 | \macrolist | ||
4455 | % | ||
4456 | \normalturnoffactive | ||
4457 | % | ||
4458 | % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any | ||
4459 | % (non-fully-expandable) commands. | ||
4460 | \makevalueexpandable | ||
4461 | } | ||
4462 | |||
4463 | % \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts. | ||
4464 | % | ||
4465 | \def\commondummiesnofonts{% | ||
4466 | % Control letters and accents. | ||
4467 | \definedummyletter\!% | ||
4468 | \definedummyaccent\"% | ||
4469 | \definedummyaccent\'% | ||
4470 | \definedummyletter\*% | ||
4471 | \definedummyaccent\,% | ||
4472 | \definedummyletter\.% | ||
4473 | \definedummyletter\/% | ||
4474 | \definedummyletter\:% | ||
4475 | \definedummyaccent\=% | ||
4476 | \definedummyletter\?% | ||
4477 | \definedummyaccent\^% | ||
4478 | \definedummyaccent\`% | ||
4479 | \definedummyaccent\~% | ||
4480 | \definedummyword\u | ||
4481 | \definedummyword\v | ||
4482 | \definedummyword\H | ||
4483 | \definedummyword\dotaccent | ||
4484 | \definedummyword\ogonek | ||
4485 | \definedummyword\ringaccent | ||
4486 | \definedummyword\tieaccent | ||
4487 | \definedummyword\ubaraccent | ||
4488 | \definedummyword\udotaccent | ||
4489 | \definedummyword\dotless | ||
4490 | % | ||
4491 | % Texinfo font commands. | ||
4492 | \definedummyword\b | ||
4493 | \definedummyword\i | ||
4494 | \definedummyword\r | ||
4495 | \definedummyword\sansserif | ||
4496 | \definedummyword\sc | ||
4497 | \definedummyword\slanted | ||
4498 | \definedummyword\t | ||
4499 | % | ||
4500 | % Commands that take arguments. | ||
4501 | \definedummyword\acronym | ||
4502 | \definedummyword\anchor | ||
4503 | \definedummyword\cite | ||
4504 | \definedummyword\code | ||
4505 | \definedummyword\command | ||
4506 | \definedummyword\dfn | ||
4507 | \definedummyword\dmn | ||
4508 | \definedummyword\email | ||
4509 | \definedummyword\emph | ||
4510 | \definedummyword\env | ||
4511 | \definedummyword\file | ||
4512 | \definedummyword\indicateurl | ||
4513 | \definedummyword\kbd | ||
4514 | \definedummyword\key | ||
4515 | \definedummyword\math | ||
4516 | \definedummyword\option | ||
4517 | \definedummyword\pxref | ||
4518 | \definedummyword\ref | ||
4519 | \definedummyword\samp | ||
4520 | \definedummyword\strong | ||
4521 | \definedummyword\tie | ||
4522 | \definedummyword\uref | ||
4523 | \definedummyword\url | ||
4524 | \definedummyword\var | ||
4525 | \definedummyword\verb | ||
4526 | \definedummyword\w | ||
4527 | \definedummyword\xref | ||
4528 | } | ||
4529 | |||
4530 | % \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index | ||
4531 | % by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all | ||
4532 | % control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string | ||
4533 | % would be for a given command (usually its argument). | ||
4534 | % | ||
4535 | \def\indexnofonts{% | ||
4536 | % Accent commands should become @asis. | ||
4537 | \def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}% | ||
4538 | % We can just ignore other control letters. | ||
4539 | \def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}% | ||
4540 | % All control words become @asis by default; overrides below. | ||
4541 | \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent | ||
4542 | % | ||
4543 | \commondummiesnofonts | ||
4544 | % | ||
4545 | % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command | ||
4546 | % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc. | ||
4547 | % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands. | ||
4548 | %\let\tt=\asis | ||
4549 | % | ||
4550 | \def\ { }% | ||
4551 | \def\@{@}% | ||
4552 | \def\_{\normalunderscore}% | ||
4553 | \def\-{}% @- shouldn't affect sorting | ||
4554 | % | ||
4555 | % Unfortunately, texindex is not prepared to handle braces in the | ||
4556 | % content at all. So for index sorting, we map @{ and @} to strings | ||
4557 | % starting with |, since that ASCII character is between ASCII { and }. | ||
4558 | \def\{{|a}% | ||
4559 | \def\}{|b}% | ||
4560 | % | ||
4561 | % Non-English letters. | ||
4562 | \def\AA{AA}% | ||
4563 | \def\AE{AE}% | ||
4564 | \def\DH{DZZ}% | ||
4565 | \def\L{L}% | ||
4566 | \def\OE{OE}% | ||
4567 | \def\O{O}% | ||
4568 | \def\TH{ZZZ}% | ||
4569 | \def\aa{aa}% | ||
4570 | \def\ae{ae}% | ||
4571 | \def\dh{dzz}% | ||
4572 | \def\exclamdown{!}% | ||
4573 | \def\l{l}% | ||
4574 | \def\oe{oe}% | ||
4575 | \def\ordf{a}% | ||
4576 | \def\ordm{o}% | ||
4577 | \def\o{o}% | ||
4578 | \def\questiondown{?}% | ||
4579 | \def\ss{ss}% | ||
4580 | \def\th{zzz}% | ||
4581 | % | ||
4582 | \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}% | ||
4583 | \def\TeX{TeX}% | ||
4584 | % | ||
4585 | % Assorted special characters. | ||
4586 | % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.) | ||
4587 | \def\arrow{->}% | ||
4588 | \def\bullet{bullet}% | ||
4589 | \def\comma{,}% | ||
4590 | \def\copyright{copyright}% | ||
4591 | \def\dots{...}% | ||
4592 | \def\enddots{...}% | ||
4593 | \def\equiv{==}% | ||
4594 | \def\error{error}% | ||
4595 | \def\euro{euro}% | ||
4596 | \def\expansion{==>}% | ||
4597 | \def\geq{>=}% | ||
4598 | \def\guillemetleft{<<}% | ||
4599 | \def\guillemetright{>>}% | ||
4600 | \def\guilsinglleft{<}% | ||
4601 | \def\guilsinglright{>}% | ||
4602 | \def\leq{<=}% | ||
4603 | \def\minus{-}% | ||
4604 | \def\point{.}% | ||
4605 | \def\pounds{pounds}% | ||
4606 | \def\print{-|}% | ||
4607 | \def\quotedblbase{"}% | ||
4608 | \def\quotedblleft{"}% | ||
4609 | \def\quotedblright{"}% | ||
4610 | \def\quoteleft{`}% | ||
4611 | \def\quoteright{'}% | ||
4612 | \def\quotesinglbase{,}% | ||
4613 | \def\registeredsymbol{R}% | ||
4614 | \def\result{=>}% | ||
4615 | \def\textdegree{o}% | ||
4616 | % | ||
4617 | \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlquoteignore\endcsname\relax | ||
4618 | \else \indexlquoteignore \fi | ||
4619 | % | ||
4620 | % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present). | ||
4621 | % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now. | ||
4622 | % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up | ||
4623 | % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry | ||
4624 | % that starts with \. | ||
4625 | % | ||
4626 | % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them | ||
4627 | % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that | ||
4628 | % goes to end-of-line is not handled. | ||
4629 | % | ||
4630 | \macrolist | ||
4631 | } | ||
4632 | |||
4633 | % Undocumented (for FSFS 2nd ed.): @set txiindexlquoteignore makes us | ||
4634 | % ignore left quotes in the sort term. | ||
4635 | {\catcode`\`=\active | ||
4636 | \gdef\indexlquoteignore{\let`=\empty}} | ||
4637 | |||
4638 | \let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex. | ||
4639 | \let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)? | ||
4640 | |||
4641 | % Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case. | ||
4642 | % #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text. | ||
4643 | \def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}} | ||
4644 | |||
4645 | % Workhorse for all \fooindexes. | ||
4646 | % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry -- | ||
4647 | % empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception | ||
4648 | % is with most defuns, which call us directly). | ||
4649 | % | ||
4650 | \def\dosubind#1#2#3{% | ||
4651 | \iflinks | ||
4652 | {% | ||
4653 | % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg). | ||
4654 | \toks0 = {#2}% | ||
4655 | % If third arg is present, precede it with a space. | ||
4656 | \def\thirdarg{#3}% | ||
4657 | \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else | ||
4658 | \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}% | ||
4659 | \fi | ||
4660 | % | ||
4661 | \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}% | ||
4662 | % | ||
4663 | \safewhatsit\dosubindwrite | ||
4664 | }% | ||
4665 | \fi | ||
4666 | } | ||
4667 | |||
4668 | % Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file: | ||
4669 | % | ||
4670 | \def\dosubindwrite{% | ||
4671 | % Put the index entry in the margin if desired. | ||
4672 | \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else | ||
4673 | \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}% | ||
4674 | \fi | ||
4675 | % | ||
4676 | % Remember, we are within a group. | ||
4677 | \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage | ||
4678 | \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now | ||
4679 | % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash. | ||
4680 | % | ||
4681 | % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to | ||
4682 | % get the string to sort by. | ||
4683 | {\indexnofonts | ||
4684 | \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion | ||
4685 | \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}% | ||
4686 | }% | ||
4687 | % | ||
4688 | % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and | ||
4689 | % the original text, including any font commands. We write | ||
4690 | % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the | ||
4691 | % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s | ||
4692 | % sorted result. | ||
4693 | \edef\temp{% | ||
4694 | \write\writeto{% | ||
4695 | \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}% | ||
4696 | }% | ||
4697 | \temp | ||
4698 | } | ||
4699 | |||
4700 | % Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit: | ||
4701 | % | ||
4702 | % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it | ||
4703 | % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting | ||
4704 | % the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the | ||
4705 | % \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that | ||
4706 | % sequences like this: | ||
4707 | % @end defun | ||
4708 | % @tindex whatever | ||
4709 | % @defun ... | ||
4710 | % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the | ||
4711 | % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of | ||
4712 | % the previous defun. | ||
4713 | % | ||
4714 | % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We | ||
4715 | % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph. | ||
4716 | % | ||
4717 | % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too. | ||
4718 | % | ||
4719 | % But wait, there is a catch there: | ||
4720 | % We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not | ||
4721 | % sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts | ||
4722 | % of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual | ||
4723 | % representation of the skip. | ||
4724 | % | ||
4725 | % The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that | ||
4726 | % the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter). | ||
4727 | % | ||
4728 | \edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname} | ||
4729 | % | ||
4730 | \newskip\whatsitskip | ||
4731 | \newcount\whatsitpenalty | ||
4732 | % | ||
4733 | % ..., ready, GO: | ||
4734 | % | ||
4735 | \def\safewhatsit#1{% | ||
4736 | \ifhmode | ||
4737 | #1% | ||
4738 | \else | ||
4739 | % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously. | ||
4740 | \whatsitskip = \lastskip | ||
4741 | \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}% | ||
4742 | \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty | ||
4743 | % | ||
4744 | % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a | ||
4745 | % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this | ||
4746 | % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a | ||
4747 | % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential | ||
4748 | % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed. | ||
4749 | \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro | ||
4750 | \else | ||
4751 | \vskip-\whatsitskip | ||
4752 | \fi | ||
4753 | % | ||
4754 | #1% | ||
4755 | % | ||
4756 | \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro | ||
4757 | % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and | ||
4758 | % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want | ||
4759 | % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various | ||
4760 | % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any | ||
4761 | % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example: | ||
4762 | % | ||
4763 | % @deffn deffn-whatever | ||
4764 | % @vindex index-whatever | ||
4765 | % Description. | ||
4766 | % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit | ||
4767 | % and the "Description." paragraph. | ||
4768 | \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi | ||
4769 | \else | ||
4770 | % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip, | ||
4771 | % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item | ||
4772 | % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak. | ||
4773 | \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip | ||
4774 | \fi | ||
4775 | \fi | ||
4776 | } | ||
4777 | |||
4778 | % The index entry written in the file actually looks like | ||
4779 | % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} | ||
4780 | % or | ||
4781 | % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic} | ||
4782 | % The texindex program reads in these files and writes files | ||
4783 | % containing these kinds of lines: | ||
4784 | % \initial {c} | ||
4785 | % before the first topic whose initial is c | ||
4786 | % \entry {topic}{pagelist} | ||
4787 | % for a topic that is used without subtopics | ||
4788 | % \primary {topic} | ||
4789 | % for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics | ||
4790 | % \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist} | ||
4791 | % for each subtopic. | ||
4792 | |||
4793 | % Define the user-accessible indexing commands | ||
4794 | % @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex. | ||
4795 | |||
4796 | \def\findex {\fnindex} | ||
4797 | \def\kindex {\kyindex} | ||
4798 | \def\cindex {\cpindex} | ||
4799 | \def\vindex {\vrindex} | ||
4800 | \def\tindex {\tpindex} | ||
4801 | \def\pindex {\pgindex} | ||
4802 | |||
4803 | \def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub} | ||
4804 | {\obeylines % | ||
4805 | \gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup % | ||
4806 | \dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}} | ||
4807 | |||
4808 | % Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. | ||
4809 | |||
4810 | % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed. | ||
4811 | % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered). | ||
4812 | % | ||
4813 | \parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup | ||
4814 | \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}% | ||
4815 | % | ||
4816 | \smallfonts \rm | ||
4817 | \tolerance = 9500 | ||
4818 | \plainfrenchspacing | ||
4819 | \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression. | ||
4820 | % | ||
4821 | % See if the index file exists and is nonempty. | ||
4822 | % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains | ||
4823 | % \initial {@} | ||
4824 | % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces | ||
4825 | % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence). | ||
4826 | \catcode`\@ = 11 | ||
4827 | \openin 1 \jobname.#1s | ||
4828 | \ifeof 1 | ||
4829 | % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, | ||
4830 | % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the | ||
4831 | % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure | ||
4832 | % there is some text. | ||
4833 | \putwordIndexNonexistent | ||
4834 | \else | ||
4835 | % | ||
4836 | % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof | ||
4837 | % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so | ||
4838 | % it can discover if there is anything in it. | ||
4839 | \read 1 to \temp | ||
4840 | \ifeof 1 | ||
4841 | \putwordIndexIsEmpty | ||
4842 | \else | ||
4843 | % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape | ||
4844 | % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change | ||
4845 | % to make right now. | ||
4846 | \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}% | ||
4847 | \catcode`\\ = 0 | ||
4848 | \escapechar = `\\ | ||
4849 | \begindoublecolumns | ||
4850 | \input \jobname.#1s | ||
4851 | \enddoublecolumns | ||
4852 | \fi | ||
4853 | \fi | ||
4854 | \closein 1 | ||
4855 | \endgroup} | ||
4856 | |||
4857 | % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. | ||
4858 | % Change them to control the appearance of the index. | ||
4859 | |||
4860 | \def\initial#1{{% | ||
4861 | % Some minor font changes for the special characters. | ||
4862 | \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt | ||
4863 | % | ||
4864 | % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own. | ||
4865 | \removelastskip | ||
4866 | % | ||
4867 | % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus. | ||
4868 | \nobreak | ||
4869 | \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip | ||
4870 | \penalty 0 | ||
4871 | \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip | ||
4872 | % | ||
4873 | % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of | ||
4874 | % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column | ||
4875 | % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch | ||
4876 | % we need before each entry, but it's better. | ||
4877 | % | ||
4878 | % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns. | ||
4879 | \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip | ||
4880 | \leftline{\secbf #1}% | ||
4881 | % Do our best not to break after the initial. | ||
4882 | \nobreak | ||
4883 | \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip | ||
4884 | }} | ||
4885 | |||
4886 | % \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and | ||
4887 | % then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index | ||
4888 | % and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. | ||
4889 | % | ||
4890 | % A straightforward implementation would start like this: | ||
4891 | % \def\entry#1#2{... | ||
4892 | % But this freezes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to | ||
4893 | % @code, which sets - active. This problem was fixed by a kludge--- | ||
4894 | % ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right. | ||
4895 | % The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text. | ||
4896 | % --kasal, 21nov03 | ||
4897 | \def\entry{% | ||
4898 | \begingroup | ||
4899 | % | ||
4900 | % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't | ||
4901 | % affect previous text. | ||
4902 | \par | ||
4903 | % | ||
4904 | % Do not fill out the last line with white space. | ||
4905 | \parfillskip = 0in | ||
4906 | % | ||
4907 | % No extra space above this paragraph. | ||
4908 | \parskip = 0in | ||
4909 | % | ||
4910 | % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines. | ||
4911 | \finalhyphendemerits = 0 | ||
4912 | % | ||
4913 | % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number | ||
4914 | % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the | ||
4915 | % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large | ||
4916 | % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across | ||
4917 | % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders. | ||
4918 | % | ||
4919 | % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start | ||
4920 | % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that. | ||
4921 | \hangindent = 2em | ||
4922 | % | ||
4923 | % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line | ||
4924 | % with blank space. | ||
4925 | \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil | ||
4926 | % | ||
4927 | % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing | ||
4928 | % columns. | ||
4929 | \vskip 0pt plus1pt | ||
4930 | % | ||
4931 | % When reading the text of entry, convert explicit line breaks | ||
4932 | % from @* into spaces. The user might give these in long section | ||
4933 | % titles, for instance. | ||
4934 | \def\*{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}% | ||
4935 | \def\entrybreak{\hfil\break}% | ||
4936 | % | ||
4937 | % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter): | ||
4938 | \afterassignment\doentry | ||
4939 | \let\temp = | ||
4940 | } | ||
4941 | \def\entrybreak{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}% | ||
4942 | \def\doentry{% | ||
4943 | \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace. | ||
4944 | \noindent | ||
4945 | \aftergroup\finishentry | ||
4946 | % And now comes the text of the entry. | ||
4947 | } | ||
4948 | \def\finishentry#1{% | ||
4949 | % #1 is the page number. | ||
4950 | % | ||
4951 | % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if | ||
4952 | % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be | ||
4953 | % cursed by a Unix daemon. | ||
4954 | \setbox\boxA = \hbox{#1}% | ||
4955 | \ifdim\wd\boxA = 0pt | ||
4956 | \ % | ||
4957 | \else | ||
4958 | % | ||
4959 | % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out | ||
4960 | % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the | ||
4961 | % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.) | ||
4962 | \hfil\penalty50 | ||
4963 | \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number. | ||
4964 | % | ||
4965 | % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as | ||
4966 | % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull | ||
4967 | % \hbox ensues. | ||
4968 | \ifpdf | ||
4969 | \pdfgettoks#1.% | ||
4970 | \ \the\toksA | ||
4971 | \else | ||
4972 | \ #1% | ||
4973 | \fi | ||
4974 | \fi | ||
4975 | \par | ||
4976 | \endgroup | ||
4977 | } | ||
4978 | |||
4979 | % Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em. | ||
4980 | \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders | ||
4981 | \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill} | ||
4982 | |||
4983 | \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}} | ||
4984 | |||
4985 | \newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm | ||
4986 | \def\secondary#1#2{{% | ||
4987 | \parfillskip=0in | ||
4988 | \parskip=0in | ||
4989 | \hangindent=1in | ||
4990 | \hangafter=1 | ||
4991 | \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill | ||
4992 | \ifpdf | ||
4993 | \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph. | ||
4994 | \else | ||
4995 | #2 | ||
4996 | \fi | ||
4997 | \par | ||
4998 | }} | ||
4999 | |||
5000 | % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes. | ||
5001 | % Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say, | ||
5002 | % the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself. | ||
5003 | \catcode`\@=11 | ||
5004 | |||
5005 | \newbox\partialpage | ||
5006 | \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize | ||
5007 | |||
5008 | \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns | ||
5009 | % Grab any single-column material above us. | ||
5010 | \output = {% | ||
5011 | % | ||
5012 | % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a | ||
5013 | % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output | ||
5014 | % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is | ||
5015 | % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In | ||
5016 | % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal | ||
5017 | % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this | ||
5018 | % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case. | ||
5019 | \ifvoid\partialpage \else | ||
5020 | \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}% | ||
5021 | \fi | ||
5022 | % | ||
5023 | \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{% | ||
5024 | % Unvbox the main output page. | ||
5025 | \unvbox\PAGE | ||
5026 | \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip | ||
5027 | }% | ||
5028 | }% | ||
5029 | \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage | ||
5030 | % | ||
5031 | % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages. | ||
5032 | \output = {\doublecolumnout}% | ||
5033 | % | ||
5034 | % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this | ||
5035 | % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 | ||
5036 | % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple | ||
5037 | % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the | ||
5038 | % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place. | ||
5039 | % | ||
5040 | % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between | ||
5041 | % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it | ||
5042 | % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant | ||
5043 | % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt) | ||
5044 | % as it did when we hard-coded it. | ||
5045 | % | ||
5046 | % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we | ||
5047 | % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) | ||
5048 | % been clobbered. | ||
5049 | % | ||
5050 | \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize | ||
5051 | \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize | ||
5052 | \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2 | ||
5053 | \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize | ||
5054 | % | ||
5055 | % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here, | ||
5056 | % since nobody clobbers \vsize.) | ||
5057 | \vsize = 2\vsize | ||
5058 | } | ||
5059 | |||
5060 | % The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except | ||
5061 | % the last. | ||
5062 | % | ||
5063 | \def\doublecolumnout{% | ||
5064 | \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth | ||
5065 | % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal | ||
5066 | % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the | ||
5067 | % previous page. | ||
5068 | \dimen@ = \vsize | ||
5069 | \divide\dimen@ by 2 | ||
5070 | \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage | ||
5071 | % | ||
5072 | % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right. | ||
5073 | \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ | ||
5074 | \onepageout\pagesofar | ||
5075 | \unvbox255 | ||
5076 | \penalty\outputpenalty | ||
5077 | } | ||
5078 | % | ||
5079 | % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material, | ||
5080 | % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2. | ||
5081 | \def\pagesofar{% | ||
5082 | \unvbox\partialpage | ||
5083 | % | ||
5084 | \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize | ||
5085 | \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize | ||
5086 | \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% | ||
5087 | } | ||
5088 | % | ||
5089 | % All done with double columns. | ||
5090 | \def\enddoublecolumns{% | ||
5091 | % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised | ||
5092 | % _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the | ||
5093 | % following situation: | ||
5094 | % | ||
5095 | % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry. | ||
5096 | % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no | ||
5097 | % break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last | ||
5098 | % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not | ||
5099 | % fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following | ||
5100 | % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject | ||
5101 | % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output | ||
5102 | % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last | ||
5103 | % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which | ||
5104 | % is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with | ||
5105 | % the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as | ||
5106 | % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page | ||
5107 | % break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the | ||
5108 | % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page | ||
5109 | % goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final | ||
5110 | % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after | ||
5111 | % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns | ||
5112 | % and the final section into the vbox of \pageheight (see | ||
5113 | % \pagebody), causing an overfull box. | ||
5114 | % | ||
5115 | % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the | ||
5116 | % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281). | ||
5117 | \penalty0 | ||
5118 | % | ||
5119 | \output = {% | ||
5120 | % Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the | ||
5121 | % current page, no automatic page break. | ||
5122 | \balancecolumns | ||
5123 | % | ||
5124 | % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page, | ||
5125 | % though, there will be another page break right after this \output | ||
5126 | % invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not | ||
5127 | % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal | ||
5128 | % definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be | ||
5129 | % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes | ||
5130 | % the output somewhat more palatable.) | ||
5131 | \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}% | ||
5132 | }% | ||
5133 | \eject | ||
5134 | \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns | ||
5135 | % | ||
5136 | % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted | ||
5137 | % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column | ||
5138 | % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the | ||
5139 | % \endgroup where \vsize got restored). | ||
5140 | \pagegoal = \vsize | ||
5141 | } | ||
5142 | % | ||
5143 | % Called at the end of the double column material. | ||
5144 | \def\balancecolumns{% | ||
5145 | \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120. | ||
5146 | \dimen@ = \ht0 | ||
5147 | \advance\dimen@ by \topskip | ||
5148 | \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip | ||
5149 | \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to | ||
5150 | %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}% | ||
5151 | \splittopskip = \topskip | ||
5152 | % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint. | ||
5153 | {% | ||
5154 | \vbadness = 10000 | ||
5155 | \loop | ||
5156 | \global\setbox3 = \copy0 | ||
5157 | \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@ | ||
5158 | \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@ | ||
5159 | \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt | ||
5160 | \repeat | ||
5161 | }% | ||
5162 | %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}% | ||
5163 | \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}% | ||
5164 | \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}% | ||
5165 | % | ||
5166 | \pagesofar | ||
5167 | } | ||
5168 | \catcode`\@ = \other | ||
5169 | |||
5170 | |||
5171 | \message{sectioning,} | ||
5172 | % Chapters, sections, etc. | ||
5173 | |||
5174 | % Let's start with @part. | ||
5175 | \outer\parseargdef\part{\partzzz{#1}} | ||
5176 | \def\partzzz#1{% | ||
5177 | \chapoddpage | ||
5178 | \null | ||
5179 | \vskip.3\vsize % move it down on the page a bit | ||
5180 | \begingroup | ||
5181 | \noindent \titlefonts\rmisbold #1\par % the text | ||
5182 | \let\lastnode=\empty % no node to associate with | ||
5183 | \writetocentry{part}{#1}{}% but put it in the toc | ||
5184 | \headingsoff % no headline or footline on the part page | ||
5185 | \chapoddpage | ||
5186 | \endgroup | ||
5187 | } | ||
5188 | |||
5189 | % \unnumberedno is an oxymoron. But we count the unnumbered | ||
5190 | % sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf | ||
5191 | % outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter | ||
5192 | % numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000 | ||
5193 | % chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.) | ||
5194 | \newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000 | ||
5195 | \newcount\chapno | ||
5196 | \newcount\secno \secno=0 | ||
5197 | \newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0 | ||
5198 | \newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0 | ||
5199 | |||
5200 | % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... | ||
5201 | \newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@ | ||
5202 | % | ||
5203 | % \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} | ||
5204 | % We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple | ||
5205 | % construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual | ||
5206 | % letter in the expansion, not just typeset. | ||
5207 | % | ||
5208 | \def\appendixletter{% | ||
5209 | \ifnum\appendixno=`A A% | ||
5210 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B% | ||
5211 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C% | ||
5212 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D% | ||
5213 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E% | ||
5214 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F% | ||
5215 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G% | ||
5216 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H% | ||
5217 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I% | ||
5218 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J% | ||
5219 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K% | ||
5220 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L% | ||
5221 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M% | ||
5222 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N% | ||
5223 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O% | ||
5224 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P% | ||
5225 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q% | ||
5226 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R% | ||
5227 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S% | ||
5228 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T% | ||
5229 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U% | ||
5230 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V% | ||
5231 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W% | ||
5232 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X% | ||
5233 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y% | ||
5234 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z% | ||
5235 | % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is | ||
5236 | % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not | ||
5237 | % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out | ||
5238 | % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it. | ||
5239 | \else\char\the\appendixno | ||
5240 | \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi | ||
5241 | \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} | ||
5242 | |||
5243 | % Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number | ||
5244 | % and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use | ||
5245 | % these. @section does likewise. | ||
5246 | \def\thischapter{} | ||
5247 | \def\thischapternum{} | ||
5248 | \def\thischaptername{} | ||
5249 | \def\thissection{} | ||
5250 | \def\thissectionnum{} | ||
5251 | \def\thissectionname{} | ||
5252 | |||
5253 | \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level | ||
5254 | \newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count | ||
5255 | |||
5256 | % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc. | ||
5257 | \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1} | ||
5258 | \let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name | ||
5259 | |||
5260 | % @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc. | ||
5261 | \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1} | ||
5262 | \let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name | ||
5263 | |||
5264 | % we only have subsub. | ||
5265 | \chardef\maxseclevel = 3 | ||
5266 | % | ||
5267 | % A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too. | ||
5268 | % To achieve this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in: | ||
5269 | \chardef\unnlevel = \maxseclevel | ||
5270 | % | ||
5271 | % Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not: | ||
5272 | % \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored. | ||
5273 | \def\chapheadtype{N} | ||
5274 | |||
5275 | % Choose a heading macro | ||
5276 | % #1 is heading type | ||
5277 | % #2 is heading level | ||
5278 | % #3 is text for heading | ||
5279 | \def\genhead#1#2#3{% | ||
5280 | % Compute the abs. sec. level: | ||
5281 | \absseclevel=#2 | ||
5282 | \advance\absseclevel by \secbase | ||
5283 | % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range: | ||
5284 | \ifnum \absseclevel < 0 | ||
5285 | \absseclevel = 0 | ||
5286 | \else | ||
5287 | \ifnum \absseclevel > 3 | ||
5288 | \absseclevel = 3 | ||
5289 | \fi | ||
5290 | \fi | ||
5291 | % The heading type: | ||
5292 | \def\headtype{#1}% | ||
5293 | \if \headtype U% | ||
5294 | \ifnum \absseclevel < \unnlevel | ||
5295 | \chardef\unnlevel = \absseclevel | ||
5296 | \fi | ||
5297 | \else | ||
5298 | % Check for appendix sections: | ||
5299 | \ifnum \absseclevel = 0 | ||
5300 | \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}% | ||
5301 | \else | ||
5302 | \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N% | ||
5303 | \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}% | ||
5304 | \fi\fi | ||
5305 | \fi | ||
5306 | % Check for numbered within unnumbered: | ||
5307 | \ifnum \absseclevel > \unnlevel | ||
5308 | \def\headtype{U}% | ||
5309 | \else | ||
5310 | \chardef\unnlevel = 3 | ||
5311 | \fi | ||
5312 | \fi | ||
5313 | % Now print the heading: | ||
5314 | \if \headtype U% | ||
5315 | \ifcase\absseclevel | ||
5316 | \unnumberedzzz{#3}% | ||
5317 | \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}% | ||
5318 | \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}% | ||
5319 | \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% | ||
5320 | \fi | ||
5321 | \else | ||
5322 | \if \headtype A% | ||
5323 | \ifcase\absseclevel | ||
5324 | \appendixzzz{#3}% | ||
5325 | \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}% | ||
5326 | \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}% | ||
5327 | \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}% | ||
5328 | \fi | ||
5329 | \else | ||
5330 | \ifcase\absseclevel | ||
5331 | \chapterzzz{#3}% | ||
5332 | \or \seczzz{#3}% | ||
5333 | \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}% | ||
5334 | \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% | ||
5335 | \fi | ||
5336 | \fi | ||
5337 | \fi | ||
5338 | \suppressfirstparagraphindent | ||
5339 | } | ||
5340 | |||
5341 | % an interface: | ||
5342 | \def\numhead{\genhead N} | ||
5343 | \def\apphead{\genhead A} | ||
5344 | \def\unnmhead{\genhead U} | ||
5345 | |||
5346 | % @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset | ||
5347 | % all lower-level sectioning counters to zero. | ||
5348 | % | ||
5349 | % Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers | ||
5350 | % (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty. | ||
5351 | \let\chaplevelprefix = \empty | ||
5352 | % | ||
5353 | \outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz | ||
5354 | \def\chapterzzz#1{% | ||
5355 | % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such | ||
5356 | % as an @include file. | ||
5357 | \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 | ||
5358 | \global\advance\chapno by 1 | ||
5359 | % | ||
5360 | % Used for \float. | ||
5361 | \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}% | ||
5362 | \resetallfloatnos | ||
5363 | % | ||
5364 | % \putwordChapter can contain complex things in translations. | ||
5365 | \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordChapter}% | ||
5366 | \message{\the\toks0 \space \the\chapno}% | ||
5367 | % | ||
5368 | % Write the actual heading. | ||
5369 | \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}% | ||
5370 | % | ||
5371 | % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter. | ||
5372 | \global\let\section = \numberedsec | ||
5373 | \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec | ||
5374 | \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec | ||
5375 | } | ||
5376 | |||
5377 | \outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally calls appendixzzz | ||
5378 | % | ||
5379 | \def\appendixzzz#1{% | ||
5380 | \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 | ||
5381 | \global\advance\appendixno by 1 | ||
5382 | \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}% | ||
5383 | \resetallfloatnos | ||
5384 | % | ||
5385 | % \putwordAppendix can contain complex things in translations. | ||
5386 | \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordAppendix}% | ||
5387 | \message{\the\toks0 \space \appendixletter}% | ||
5388 | % | ||
5389 | \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}% | ||
5390 | % | ||
5391 | \global\let\section = \appendixsec | ||
5392 | \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec | ||
5393 | \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec | ||
5394 | } | ||
5395 | |||
5396 | % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz: | ||
5397 | \outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} | ||
5398 | \def\unnumberedzzz#1{% | ||
5399 | \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 | ||
5400 | \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1 | ||
5401 | % | ||
5402 | % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures. | ||
5403 | \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty | ||
5404 | \resetallfloatnos | ||
5405 | % | ||
5406 | % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the | ||
5407 | % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX | ||
5408 | % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX | ||
5409 | % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant | ||
5410 | % to be executed, not expanded). | ||
5411 | % | ||
5412 | % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear | ||
5413 | % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use | ||
5414 | % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once, | ||
5415 | % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for | ||
5416 | % the toc entries.) | ||
5417 | \toks0 = {#1}% | ||
5418 | \message{(\the\toks0)}% | ||
5419 | % | ||
5420 | \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}% | ||
5421 | % | ||
5422 | \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec | ||
5423 | \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec | ||
5424 | \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec | ||
5425 | } | ||
5426 | |||
5427 | % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered. | ||
5428 | \outer\parseargdef\centerchap{% | ||
5429 | % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break | ||
5430 | % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level. | ||
5431 | % Thus we are safer this way: --kasal, 24feb04 | ||
5432 | \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters | ||
5433 | \unnmhead0{#1}% | ||
5434 | \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax | ||
5435 | } | ||
5436 | |||
5437 | % @top is like @unnumbered. | ||
5438 | \let\top\unnumbered | ||
5439 | |||
5440 | % Sections. | ||
5441 | % | ||
5442 | \outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz | ||
5443 | \def\seczzz#1{% | ||
5444 | \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 | ||
5445 | \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}% | ||
5446 | } | ||
5447 | |||
5448 | % normally calls appendixsectionzzz: | ||
5449 | \outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} | ||
5450 | \def\appendixsectionzzz#1{% | ||
5451 | \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 | ||
5452 | \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}% | ||
5453 | } | ||
5454 | \let\appendixsec\appendixsection | ||
5455 | |||
5456 | % normally calls unnumberedseczzz: | ||
5457 | \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} | ||
5458 | \def\unnumberedseczzz#1{% | ||
5459 | \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 | ||
5460 | \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}% | ||
5461 | } | ||
5462 | |||
5463 | % Subsections. | ||
5464 | % | ||
5465 | % normally calls numberedsubseczzz: | ||
5466 | \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} | ||
5467 | \def\numberedsubseczzz#1{% | ||
5468 | \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 | ||
5469 | \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% | ||
5470 | } | ||
5471 | |||
5472 | % normally calls appendixsubseczzz: | ||
5473 | \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} | ||
5474 | \def\appendixsubseczzz#1{% | ||
5475 | \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 | ||
5476 | \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}% | ||
5477 | {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% | ||
5478 | } | ||
5479 | |||
5480 | % normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz: | ||
5481 | \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} | ||
5482 | \def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{% | ||
5483 | \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 | ||
5484 | \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}% | ||
5485 | {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% | ||
5486 | } | ||
5487 | |||
5488 | % Subsubsections. | ||
5489 | % | ||
5490 | % normally numberedsubsubseczzz: | ||
5491 | \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} | ||
5492 | \def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{% | ||
5493 | \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 | ||
5494 | \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}% | ||
5495 | {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% | ||
5496 | } | ||
5497 | |||
5498 | % normally appendixsubsubseczzz: | ||
5499 | \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} | ||
5500 | \def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{% | ||
5501 | \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 | ||
5502 | \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}% | ||
5503 | {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% | ||
5504 | } | ||
5505 | |||
5506 | % normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz: | ||
5507 | \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} | ||
5508 | \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{% | ||
5509 | \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 | ||
5510 | \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}% | ||
5511 | {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% | ||
5512 | } | ||
5513 | |||
5514 | % These macros control what the section commands do, according | ||
5515 | % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered). | ||
5516 | % Define them by default for a numbered chapter. | ||
5517 | \let\section = \numberedsec | ||
5518 | \let\subsection = \numberedsubsec | ||
5519 | \let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec | ||
5520 | |||
5521 | % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading | ||
5522 | |||
5523 | % NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such: | ||
5524 | % 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit | ||
5525 | % overlong headings to fold. | ||
5526 | % 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a | ||
5527 | % heading is obnoxious; this forbids it. | ||
5528 | % 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and | ||
5529 | % if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright. | ||
5530 | |||
5531 | \def\majorheading{% | ||
5532 | {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }% | ||
5533 | \parsearg\chapheadingzzz | ||
5534 | } | ||
5535 | |||
5536 | \def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz} | ||
5537 | \def\chapheadingzzz#1{% | ||
5538 | {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 | ||
5539 | \parindent=0pt\ptexraggedright | ||
5540 | \rmisbold #1\hfill}}% | ||
5541 | \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax | ||
5542 | \suppressfirstparagraphindent | ||
5543 | } | ||
5544 | |||
5545 | % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading. | ||
5546 | \parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} | ||
5547 | \suppressfirstparagraphindent} | ||
5548 | \parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} | ||
5549 | \suppressfirstparagraphindent} | ||
5550 | \parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} | ||
5551 | \suppressfirstparagraphindent} | ||
5552 | |||
5553 | % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only | ||
5554 | % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it), | ||
5555 | % given all the information in convenient, parsed form. | ||
5556 | |||
5557 | % Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative) | ||
5558 | \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi} | ||
5559 | |||
5560 | % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed) | ||
5561 | \newskip\chapheadingskip | ||
5562 | |||
5563 | % Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it. | ||
5564 | \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} | ||
5565 | \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} | ||
5566 | % Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will | ||
5567 | % get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't | ||
5568 | % care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page. | ||
5569 | \def\chapoddpage{% | ||
5570 | \chappager | ||
5571 | \ifodd\pageno \else | ||
5572 | \begingroup | ||
5573 | \headingsoff | ||
5574 | \null | ||
5575 | \chappager | ||
5576 | \endgroup | ||
5577 | \fi | ||
5578 | } | ||
5579 | |||
5580 | \def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} | ||
5581 | |||
5582 | \def\CHAPPAGoff{% | ||
5583 | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | ||
5584 | \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak | ||
5585 | \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager} | ||
5586 | |||
5587 | \def\CHAPPAGon{% | ||
5588 | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | ||
5589 | \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager | ||
5590 | \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager | ||
5591 | \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} | ||
5592 | |||
5593 | \def\CHAPPAGodd{% | ||
5594 | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage | ||
5595 | \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage | ||
5596 | \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage | ||
5597 | \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}} | ||
5598 | |||
5599 | \CHAPPAGon | ||
5600 | |||
5601 | % Chapter opening. | ||
5602 | % | ||
5603 | % #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, | ||
5604 | % Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number. | ||
5605 | % | ||
5606 | % To test against our argument. | ||
5607 | \def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing} | ||
5608 | \def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc} | ||
5609 | \def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix} | ||
5610 | % | ||
5611 | \def\chapmacro#1#2#3{% | ||
5612 | % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). | ||
5613 | \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs | ||
5614 | \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs | ||
5615 | \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% | ||
5616 | \gdef\thissection{}}% | ||
5617 | % | ||
5618 | \def\temptype{#2}% | ||
5619 | \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword | ||
5620 | \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% | ||
5621 | \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}% | ||
5622 | \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword | ||
5623 | \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% | ||
5624 | \gdef\thischapter{}}% | ||
5625 | \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword | ||
5626 | \toks0={#1}% | ||
5627 | \xdef\lastchapterdefs{% | ||
5628 | \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% | ||
5629 | \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}% | ||
5630 | % \noexpand\putwordAppendix avoids expanding indigestible | ||
5631 | % commands in some of the translations. | ||
5632 | \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordAppendix{} | ||
5633 | \noexpand\thischapternum: | ||
5634 | \noexpand\thischaptername}% | ||
5635 | }% | ||
5636 | \else | ||
5637 | \toks0={#1}% | ||
5638 | \xdef\lastchapterdefs{% | ||
5639 | \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% | ||
5640 | \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}% | ||
5641 | % \noexpand\putwordChapter avoids expanding indigestible | ||
5642 | % commands in some of the translations. | ||
5643 | \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordChapter{} | ||
5644 | \noexpand\thischapternum: | ||
5645 | \noexpand\thischaptername}% | ||
5646 | }% | ||
5647 | \fi\fi\fi | ||
5648 | % | ||
5649 | % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of | ||
5650 | % the preceding space. | ||
5651 | \safewhatsit\domark | ||
5652 | % | ||
5653 | % Insert the chapter heading break. | ||
5654 | \pchapsepmacro | ||
5655 | % | ||
5656 | % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points | ||
5657 | % between here and the heading. | ||
5658 | \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs | ||
5659 | \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs | ||
5660 | \domark | ||
5661 | % | ||
5662 | {% | ||
5663 | \chapfonts \rmisbold | ||
5664 | % | ||
5665 | % Have to define \lastsection before calling \donoderef, because the | ||
5666 | % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called | ||
5667 | % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon. | ||
5668 | \gdef\lastsection{#1}% | ||
5669 | % | ||
5670 | % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix | ||
5671 | % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''. | ||
5672 | \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword | ||
5673 | \setbox0 = \hbox{}% | ||
5674 | \def\toctype{unnchap}% | ||
5675 | \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword | ||
5676 | \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry | ||
5677 | \def\toctype{omit}% | ||
5678 | \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword | ||
5679 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}% | ||
5680 | \def\toctype{app}% | ||
5681 | \else | ||
5682 | \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}% | ||
5683 | \def\toctype{numchap}% | ||
5684 | \fi\fi\fi | ||
5685 | % | ||
5686 | % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the | ||
5687 | % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc | ||
5688 | % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty. | ||
5689 | \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}% | ||
5690 | % | ||
5691 | % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make | ||
5692 | % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has | ||
5693 | % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the | ||
5694 | % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not | ||
5695 | % being visible, for instance under high magnification. | ||
5696 | \donoderef{#2}% | ||
5697 | % | ||
5698 | % Typeset the actual heading. | ||
5699 | \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue. | ||
5700 | \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright | ||
5701 | \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe | ||
5702 | \unhbox0 #1\par}% | ||
5703 | }% | ||
5704 | \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title | ||
5705 | \nobreak | ||
5706 | } | ||
5707 | |||
5708 | % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered. | ||
5709 | \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax | ||
5710 | \def\centerparameters{% | ||
5711 | \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip | ||
5712 | \leftskip = \rightskip | ||
5713 | \parfillskip = 0pt | ||
5714 | } | ||
5715 | |||
5716 | |||
5717 | % I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not | ||
5718 | % updating it with the new noderef stuff. We'll see. --karl, 11aug03. | ||
5719 | % | ||
5720 | \def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname} | ||
5721 | % | ||
5722 | \def\unnchfopen #1{% | ||
5723 | \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 | ||
5724 | \parindent=0pt\ptexraggedright | ||
5725 | \rmisbold #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak | ||
5726 | } | ||
5727 | \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts | ||
5728 | \vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}% | ||
5729 | \par\penalty 5000 % | ||
5730 | } | ||
5731 | \def\centerchfopen #1{% | ||
5732 | \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 | ||
5733 | \parindent=0pt | ||
5734 | \hfill {\rmisbold #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak | ||
5735 | } | ||
5736 | \def\CHAPFopen{% | ||
5737 | \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen | ||
5738 | \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen} | ||
5739 | |||
5740 | |||
5741 | % Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and | ||
5742 | % call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing. | ||
5743 | % | ||
5744 | \newskip\secheadingskip | ||
5745 | \def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}} | ||
5746 | |||
5747 | % Subsection titles. | ||
5748 | \newskip\subsecheadingskip | ||
5749 | \def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}} | ||
5750 | |||
5751 | % Subsubsection titles. | ||
5752 | \def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip} | ||
5753 | \def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak} | ||
5754 | |||
5755 | |||
5756 | % Print any size, any type, section title. | ||
5757 | % | ||
5758 | % #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is | ||
5759 | % the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the | ||
5760 | % section number. | ||
5761 | % | ||
5762 | \def\seckeyword{sec} | ||
5763 | % | ||
5764 | \def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{% | ||
5765 | {% | ||
5766 | \checkenv{}% should not be in an environment. | ||
5767 | % | ||
5768 | % Switch to the right set of fonts. | ||
5769 | \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rmisbold | ||
5770 | % | ||
5771 | \def\sectionlevel{#2}% | ||
5772 | \def\temptype{#3}% | ||
5773 | % | ||
5774 | % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). | ||
5775 | \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs | ||
5776 | \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword | ||
5777 | \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword | ||
5778 | \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% | ||
5779 | \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}% | ||
5780 | \fi | ||
5781 | \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword | ||
5782 | % Don't redefine \thissection. | ||
5783 | \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword | ||
5784 | \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword | ||
5785 | \toks0={#1}% | ||
5786 | \xdef\lastsectiondefs{% | ||
5787 | \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% | ||
5788 | \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% | ||
5789 | % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible | ||
5790 | % commands in some of the translations. | ||
5791 | \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{} | ||
5792 | \noexpand\thissectionnum: | ||
5793 | \noexpand\thissectionname}% | ||
5794 | }% | ||
5795 | \fi | ||
5796 | \else | ||
5797 | \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword | ||
5798 | \toks0={#1}% | ||
5799 | \xdef\lastsectiondefs{% | ||
5800 | \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% | ||
5801 | \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% | ||
5802 | % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible | ||
5803 | % commands in some of the translations. | ||
5804 | \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{} | ||
5805 | \noexpand\thissectionnum: | ||
5806 | \noexpand\thissectionname}% | ||
5807 | }% | ||
5808 | \fi | ||
5809 | \fi\fi\fi | ||
5810 | % | ||
5811 | % Go into vertical mode. Usually we'll already be there, but we | ||
5812 | % don't want the following whatsit to end up in a preceding paragraph | ||
5813 | % if the document didn't happen to have a blank line. | ||
5814 | \par | ||
5815 | % | ||
5816 | % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of | ||
5817 | % the preceding space. | ||
5818 | \safewhatsit\domark | ||
5819 | % | ||
5820 | % Insert space above the heading. | ||
5821 | \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname | ||
5822 | % | ||
5823 | % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points | ||
5824 | % between here and the heading. | ||
5825 | \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs | ||
5826 | \domark | ||
5827 | % | ||
5828 | % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number. | ||
5829 | \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword | ||
5830 | \setbox0 = \hbox{}% | ||
5831 | \def\toctype{unn}% | ||
5832 | \gdef\lastsection{#1}% | ||
5833 | \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword | ||
5834 | % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc, | ||
5835 | % and don't redefine \lastsection. | ||
5836 | \setbox0 = \hbox{}% | ||
5837 | \def\toctype{omit}% | ||
5838 | \let\sectionlevel=\empty | ||
5839 | \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword | ||
5840 | \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% | ||
5841 | \def\toctype{app}% | ||
5842 | \gdef\lastsection{#1}% | ||
5843 | \else | ||
5844 | \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% | ||
5845 | \def\toctype{num}% | ||
5846 | \gdef\lastsection{#1}% | ||
5847 | \fi\fi\fi | ||
5848 | % | ||
5849 | % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro. | ||
5850 | \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}% | ||
5851 | % | ||
5852 | % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex). | ||
5853 | % Again, see comments in \chapmacro. | ||
5854 | \donoderef{#3}% | ||
5855 | % | ||
5856 | % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed. | ||
5857 | % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be | ||
5858 | % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the | ||
5859 | % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that | ||
5860 | % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the | ||
5861 | % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000. | ||
5862 | \nobreak | ||
5863 | % | ||
5864 | % Output the actual section heading. | ||
5865 | \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright | ||
5866 | \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number | ||
5867 | \unhbox0 #1}% | ||
5868 | }% | ||
5869 | % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it. | ||
5870 | % Don't allow stretch, though. | ||
5871 | \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname | ||
5872 | % | ||
5873 | % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it | ||
5874 | % was followed by glue. | ||
5875 | \nobreak | ||
5876 | % | ||
5877 | % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that | ||
5878 | % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a | ||
5879 | % discardable item.) | ||
5880 | \vskip-\parskip | ||
5881 | % | ||
5882 | % This is purely so the last item on the list is a known \penalty > | ||
5883 | % 10000. This is so \startdefun can avoid allowing breakpoints after | ||
5884 | % section headings. Otherwise, it would insert a valid breakpoint between: | ||
5885 | % @section sec-whatever | ||
5886 | % @deffn def-whatever | ||
5887 | \penalty 10001 | ||
5888 | } | ||
5889 | |||
5890 | |||
5891 | \message{toc,} | ||
5892 | % Table of contents. | ||
5893 | \newwrite\tocfile | ||
5894 | |||
5895 | % Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary. | ||
5896 | % Called from @chapter, etc. | ||
5897 | % | ||
5898 | % Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno} | ||
5899 | % We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional | ||
5900 | % arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually | ||
5901 | % read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the | ||
5902 | % destination to jump to. | ||
5903 | % | ||
5904 | % We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or | ||
5905 | % any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document. | ||
5906 | % But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the | ||
5907 | % table of contents chapter openings themselves. | ||
5908 | % | ||
5909 | \newif\iftocfileopened | ||
5910 | \def\omitkeyword{omit}% | ||
5911 | % | ||
5912 | \def\writetocentry#1#2#3{% | ||
5913 | \edef\writetoctype{#1}% | ||
5914 | \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else | ||
5915 | \iftocfileopened\else | ||
5916 | \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc | ||
5917 | \global\tocfileopenedtrue | ||
5918 | \fi | ||
5919 | % | ||
5920 | \iflinks | ||
5921 | {\atdummies | ||
5922 | \edef\temp{% | ||
5923 | \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}% | ||
5924 | \temp | ||
5925 | }% | ||
5926 | \fi | ||
5927 | \fi | ||
5928 | % | ||
5929 | % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're | ||
5930 | % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't | ||
5931 | % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered | ||
5932 | % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first | ||
5933 | % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named | ||
5934 | % `1', and two named `2'. | ||
5935 | \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi | ||
5936 | } | ||
5937 | |||
5938 | |||
5939 | % These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman | ||
5940 | % fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant | ||
5941 | % with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file. | ||
5942 | % | ||
5943 | \def\activecatcodes{% | ||
5944 | \catcode`\"=\active | ||
5945 | \catcode`\$=\active | ||
5946 | \catcode`\<=\active | ||
5947 | \catcode`\>=\active | ||
5948 | \catcode`\\=\active | ||
5949 | \catcode`\^=\active | ||
5950 | \catcode`\_=\active | ||
5951 | \catcode`\|=\active | ||
5952 | \catcode`\~=\active | ||
5953 | } | ||
5954 | |||
5955 | |||
5956 | % Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input. | ||
5957 | \def\readtocfile{% | ||
5958 | \setupdatafile | ||
5959 | \activecatcodes | ||
5960 | \input \tocreadfilename | ||
5961 | } | ||
5962 | |||
5963 | \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in | ||
5964 | \newcount\savepageno | ||
5965 | \newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1 | ||
5966 | |||
5967 | % Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile. | ||
5968 | % | ||
5969 | \def\startcontents#1{% | ||
5970 | % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should | ||
5971 | % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain | ||
5972 | % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro. | ||
5973 | % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se> | ||
5974 | \contentsalignmacro | ||
5975 | \immediate\closeout\tocfile | ||
5976 | % | ||
5977 | % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. | ||
5978 | % It is abundantly clear what they are. | ||
5979 | \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% | ||
5980 | % | ||
5981 | \savepageno = \pageno | ||
5982 | \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly. | ||
5983 | \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. | ||
5984 | \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. | ||
5985 | % | ||
5986 | % Roman numerals for page numbers. | ||
5987 | \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi | ||
5988 | } | ||
5989 | |||
5990 | % redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on | ||
5991 | % \jobname.toc even if this is redefined. | ||
5992 | % | ||
5993 | \def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc} | ||
5994 | |||
5995 | % Normal (long) toc. | ||
5996 | % | ||
5997 | \def\contents{% | ||
5998 | \startcontents{\putwordTOC}% | ||
5999 | \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space | ||
6000 | \ifeof 1 \else | ||
6001 | \readtocfile | ||
6002 | \fi | ||
6003 | \vfill \eject | ||
6004 | \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect | ||
6005 | \ifeof 1 \else | ||
6006 | \pdfmakeoutlines | ||
6007 | \fi | ||
6008 | \closein 1 | ||
6009 | \endgroup | ||
6010 | \lastnegativepageno = \pageno | ||
6011 | \global\pageno = \savepageno | ||
6012 | } | ||
6013 | |||
6014 | % And just the chapters. | ||
6015 | \def\summarycontents{% | ||
6016 | \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}% | ||
6017 | % | ||
6018 | \let\partentry = \shortpartentry | ||
6019 | \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry | ||
6020 | \let\appentry = \shortchapentry | ||
6021 | \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry | ||
6022 | % We want a true roman here for the page numbers. | ||
6023 | \secfonts | ||
6024 | \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf | ||
6025 | \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt | ||
6026 | \rm | ||
6027 | \hyphenpenalty = 10000 | ||
6028 | \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little. | ||
6029 | \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{} | ||
6030 | \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry | ||
6031 | \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry | ||
6032 | \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry | ||
6033 | \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry | ||
6034 | \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry | ||
6035 | \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry | ||
6036 | \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry | ||
6037 | \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry | ||
6038 | \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space | ||
6039 | \ifeof 1 \else | ||
6040 | \readtocfile | ||
6041 | \fi | ||
6042 | \closein 1 | ||
6043 | \vfill \eject | ||
6044 | \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect | ||
6045 | \endgroup | ||
6046 | \lastnegativepageno = \pageno | ||
6047 | \global\pageno = \savepageno | ||
6048 | } | ||
6049 | \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents | ||
6050 | |||
6051 | % Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents. | ||
6052 | % The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter. | ||
6053 | % | ||
6054 | \def\shortchaplabel#1{% | ||
6055 | % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the | ||
6056 | % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts. | ||
6057 | % But use \hss just in case. | ||
6058 | % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after | ||
6059 | % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.) | ||
6060 | % | ||
6061 | % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange | ||
6062 | % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and | ||
6063 | % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10 | ||
6064 | % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters | ||
6065 | % there are before deciding ... | ||
6066 | \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}% | ||
6067 | } | ||
6068 | |||
6069 | % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents. | ||
6070 | % The first argument is the chapter or section name. | ||
6071 | % The last argument is the page number. | ||
6072 | % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ... | ||
6073 | |||
6074 | % Parts, in the main contents. Replace the part number, which doesn't | ||
6075 | % exist, with an empty box. Let's hope all the numbers have the same width. | ||
6076 | % Also ignore the page number, which is conventionally not printed. | ||
6077 | \def\numeralbox{\setbox0=\hbox{8}\hbox to \wd0{\hfil}} | ||
6078 | \def\partentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\numeralbox\labelspace#1}{}} | ||
6079 | % | ||
6080 | % Parts, in the short toc. | ||
6081 | \def\shortpartentry#1#2#3#4{% | ||
6082 | \penalty-300 | ||
6083 | \vskip.5\baselineskip plus.15\baselineskip minus.1\baselineskip | ||
6084 | \shortchapentry{{\bf #1}}{\numeralbox}{}{}% | ||
6085 | } | ||
6086 | |||
6087 | % Chapters, in the main contents. | ||
6088 | \def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} | ||
6089 | % | ||
6090 | % Chapters, in the short toc. | ||
6091 | % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings. | ||
6092 | \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{% | ||
6093 | \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}% | ||
6094 | } | ||
6095 | |||
6096 | % Appendices, in the main contents. | ||
6097 | % Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box. | ||
6098 | % | ||
6099 | \def\appendixbox#1{% | ||
6100 | % We use M since it's probably the widest letter. | ||
6101 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}% | ||
6102 | \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}} | ||
6103 | % | ||
6104 | \def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}} | ||
6105 | |||
6106 | % Unnumbered chapters. | ||
6107 | \def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}} | ||
6108 | \def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}} | ||
6109 | |||
6110 | % Sections. | ||
6111 | \def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} | ||
6112 | \let\appsecentry=\numsecentry | ||
6113 | \def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}} | ||
6114 | |||
6115 | % Subsections. | ||
6116 | \def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} | ||
6117 | \let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry | ||
6118 | \def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}} | ||
6119 | |||
6120 | % And subsubsections. | ||
6121 | \def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} | ||
6122 | \let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry | ||
6123 | \def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}} | ||
6124 | |||
6125 | % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels. | ||
6126 | % Same as \defaultparindent. | ||
6127 | \newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt | ||
6128 | |||
6129 | % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the | ||
6130 | % page number. | ||
6131 | % | ||
6132 | % If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters | ||
6133 | % if at all possible; hence the \penalty. | ||
6134 | \def\dochapentry#1#2{% | ||
6135 | \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip | ||
6136 | \begingroup | ||
6137 | \chapentryfonts | ||
6138 | \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% | ||
6139 | \endgroup | ||
6140 | \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip | ||
6141 | } | ||
6142 | |||
6143 | \def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup | ||
6144 | \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent | ||
6145 | \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% | ||
6146 | \endgroup} | ||
6147 | |||
6148 | \def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup | ||
6149 | \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent | ||
6150 | \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% | ||
6151 | \endgroup} | ||
6152 | |||
6153 | \def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup | ||
6154 | \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent | ||
6155 | \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% | ||
6156 | \endgroup} | ||
6157 | |||
6158 | % We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries. | ||
6159 | \let\tocentry = \entry | ||
6160 | |||
6161 | % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title. | ||
6162 | \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax} | ||
6163 | |||
6164 | \def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}} | ||
6165 | \def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}} | ||
6166 | |||
6167 | \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm} | ||
6168 | \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts} | ||
6169 | \def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts} | ||
6170 | \def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts} | ||
6171 | |||
6172 | |||
6173 | \message{environments,} | ||
6174 | % @foo ... @end foo. | ||
6175 | |||
6176 | % @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw TeX temporarily. | ||
6177 | % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works. | ||
6178 | % But \@ or @@ will get a plain @ character. | ||
6179 | |||
6180 | \envdef\tex{% | ||
6181 | \setupmarkupstyle{tex}% | ||
6182 | \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 | ||
6183 | \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 | ||
6184 | \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie | ||
6185 | \catcode `\%=14 | ||
6186 | \catcode `\+=\other | ||
6187 | \catcode `\"=\other | ||
6188 | \catcode `\|=\other | ||
6189 | \catcode `\<=\other | ||
6190 | \catcode `\>=\other | ||
6191 | \catcode`\`=\other | ||
6192 | \catcode`\'=\other | ||
6193 | \escapechar=`\\ | ||
6194 | % | ||
6195 | % ' is active in math mode (mathcode"8000). So reset it, and all our | ||
6196 | % other math active characters (just in case), to plain's definitions. | ||
6197 | \mathactive | ||
6198 | % | ||
6199 | \let\b=\ptexb | ||
6200 | \let\bullet=\ptexbullet | ||
6201 | \let\c=\ptexc | ||
6202 | \let\,=\ptexcomma | ||
6203 | \let\.=\ptexdot | ||
6204 | \let\dots=\ptexdots | ||
6205 | \let\equiv=\ptexequiv | ||
6206 | \let\!=\ptexexclam | ||
6207 | \let\i=\ptexi | ||
6208 | \let\indent=\ptexindent | ||
6209 | \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent | ||
6210 | \let\{=\ptexlbrace | ||
6211 | \let\+=\tabalign | ||
6212 | \let\}=\ptexrbrace | ||
6213 | \let\/=\ptexslash | ||
6214 | \let\*=\ptexstar | ||
6215 | \let\t=\ptext | ||
6216 | \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop % outer | ||
6217 | \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing | ||
6218 | % | ||
6219 | \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}% | ||
6220 | \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}% | ||
6221 | \def\@{@}% | ||
6222 | } | ||
6223 | % There is no need to define \Etex. | ||
6224 | |||
6225 | % Define @lisp ... @end lisp. | ||
6226 | % @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things, | ||
6227 | % including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous). | ||
6228 | |||
6229 | % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp. | ||
6230 | \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in | ||
6231 | |||
6232 | % This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other | ||
6233 | % such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't | ||
6234 | % have any width. | ||
6235 | \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf} | ||
6236 | |||
6237 | % This space is always present above and below environments. | ||
6238 | \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt | ||
6239 | |||
6240 | % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here | ||
6241 | % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip | ||
6242 | % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the | ||
6243 | % start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip. | ||
6244 | % | ||
6245 | \def\aboveenvbreak{{% | ||
6246 | % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and | ||
6247 | % \sectionheading, q.v. | ||
6248 | \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else | ||
6249 | \advance\envskipamount by \parskip | ||
6250 | \endgraf | ||
6251 | \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount | ||
6252 | \removelastskip | ||
6253 | % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak | ||
6254 | % or better ... | ||
6255 | \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi | ||
6256 | \vskip\envskipamount | ||
6257 | \fi | ||
6258 | \fi | ||
6259 | }} | ||
6260 | |||
6261 | \let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak | ||
6262 | |||
6263 | % \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will | ||
6264 | % also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again. | ||
6265 | \let\nonarrowing=\relax | ||
6266 | |||
6267 | % @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around | ||
6268 | % environment contents. | ||
6269 | \font\circle=lcircle10 | ||
6270 | \newdimen\circthick | ||
6271 | \newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner | ||
6272 | \newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip | ||
6273 | \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle | ||
6274 | % | ||
6275 | \def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth | ||
6276 | \def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}} | ||
6277 | \def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}} | ||
6278 | \def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}} | ||
6279 | \def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip | ||
6280 | \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr | ||
6281 | \hskip\rskip}} | ||
6282 | \def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip | ||
6283 | \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr | ||
6284 | \hskip\rskip}} | ||
6285 | % | ||
6286 | \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip | ||
6287 | |||
6288 | \envdef\cartouche{% | ||
6289 | \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph. | ||
6290 | \startsavinginserts | ||
6291 | \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip | ||
6292 | \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*. | ||
6293 | \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip | ||
6294 | \advance\cartinner by-\rskip | ||
6295 | \cartouter=\hsize | ||
6296 | \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either | ||
6297 | % side, and for 6pt waste from | ||
6298 | % each corner char, and rule thickness | ||
6299 | \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip | ||
6300 | % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin. | ||
6301 | \let\nonarrowing = t% | ||
6302 | % | ||
6303 | % If this cartouche directly follows a sectioning command, we need the | ||
6304 | % \parskip glue (backspaced over by default) or the cartouche can | ||
6305 | % collide with the section heading. | ||
6306 | \ifnum\lastpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \fi | ||
6307 | % | ||
6308 | \vbox\bgroup | ||
6309 | \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt | ||
6310 | \carttop | ||
6311 | \hbox\bgroup | ||
6312 | \hskip\lskip | ||
6313 | \vrule\kern3pt | ||
6314 | \vbox\bgroup | ||
6315 | \kern3pt | ||
6316 | \hsize=\cartinner | ||
6317 | \baselineskip=\normbskip | ||
6318 | \lineskip=\normlskip | ||
6319 | \parskip=\normpskip | ||
6320 | \vskip -\parskip | ||
6321 | \comment % For explanation, see the end of def\group. | ||
6322 | } | ||
6323 | \def\Ecartouche{% | ||
6324 | \ifhmode\par\fi | ||
6325 | \kern3pt | ||
6326 | \egroup | ||
6327 | \kern3pt\vrule | ||
6328 | \hskip\rskip | ||
6329 | \egroup | ||
6330 | \cartbot | ||
6331 | \egroup | ||
6332 | \checkinserts | ||
6333 | } | ||
6334 | |||
6335 | |||
6336 | % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants, | ||
6337 | % inside a group. | ||
6338 | \newdimen\nonfillparindent | ||
6339 | \def\nonfillstart{% | ||
6340 | \aboveenvbreak | ||
6341 | \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy | ||
6342 | \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens. | ||
6343 | \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines | ||
6344 | \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output | ||
6345 | \parskip = 0pt | ||
6346 | % Turn off paragraph indentation but redefine \indent to emulate | ||
6347 | % the normal \indent. | ||
6348 | \nonfillparindent=\parindent | ||
6349 | \parindent = 0pt | ||
6350 | \let\indent\nonfillindent | ||
6351 | % | ||
6352 | \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes | ||
6353 | \ifx\nonarrowing\relax | ||
6354 | \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing | ||
6355 | \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing | ||
6356 | \else | ||
6357 | \let\nonarrowing = \relax | ||
6358 | \fi | ||
6359 | \let\exdent=\nofillexdent | ||
6360 | } | ||
6361 | |||
6362 | \begingroup | ||
6363 | \obeyspaces | ||
6364 | % We want to swallow spaces (but not other tokens) after the fake | ||
6365 | % @indent in our nonfill-environments, where spaces are normally | ||
6366 | % active and set to @tie, resulting in them not being ignored after | ||
6367 | % @indent. | ||
6368 | \gdef\nonfillindent{\futurelet\temp\nonfillindentcheck}% | ||
6369 | \gdef\nonfillindentcheck{% | ||
6370 | \ifx\temp % | ||
6371 | \expandafter\nonfillindentgobble% | ||
6372 | \else% | ||
6373 | \leavevmode\nonfillindentbox% | ||
6374 | \fi% | ||
6375 | }% | ||
6376 | \endgroup | ||
6377 | \def\nonfillindentgobble#1{\nonfillindent} | ||
6378 | \def\nonfillindentbox{\hbox to \nonfillparindent{\hss}} | ||
6379 | |||
6380 | % If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small. | ||
6381 | % If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall. | ||
6382 | % This affects the following displayed environments: | ||
6383 | % @example, @display, @format, @lisp | ||
6384 | % | ||
6385 | \def\smallword{small} | ||
6386 | \def\nosmallword{nosmall} | ||
6387 | \let\SETdispenvsize\relax | ||
6388 | \def\setnormaldispenv{% | ||
6389 | \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword | ||
6390 | % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank | ||
6391 | % line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but | ||
6392 | % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient | ||
6393 | % to change the fonts afterward. | ||
6394 | \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi | ||
6395 | \smallexamplefonts \rm | ||
6396 | \fi | ||
6397 | } | ||
6398 | \def\setsmalldispenv{% | ||
6399 | \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword | ||
6400 | \else | ||
6401 | \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi | ||
6402 | \smallexamplefonts \rm | ||
6403 | \fi | ||
6404 | } | ||
6405 | |||
6406 | % We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo. | ||
6407 | % Let's do it in one command. #1 is the env name, #2 the definition. | ||
6408 | \def\makedispenvdef#1#2{% | ||
6409 | \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}% | ||
6410 | \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}% | ||
6411 | \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak | ||
6412 | \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak | ||
6413 | } | ||
6414 | |||
6415 | % Define two environment synonyms (#1 and #2) for an environment. | ||
6416 | \def\maketwodispenvdef#1#2#3{% | ||
6417 | \makedispenvdef{#1}{#3}% | ||
6418 | \makedispenvdef{#2}{#3}% | ||
6419 | } | ||
6420 | % | ||
6421 | % @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; | ||
6422 | % @example: same as @lisp. | ||
6423 | % | ||
6424 | % @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts. | ||
6425 | % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. | ||
6426 | % | ||
6427 | \maketwodispenvdef{lisp}{example}{% | ||
6428 | \nonfillstart | ||
6429 | \tt\setupmarkupstyle{example}% | ||
6430 | \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special. | ||
6431 | \gobble % eat return | ||
6432 | } | ||
6433 | % @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font. | ||
6434 | % | ||
6435 | \makedispenvdef{display}{% | ||
6436 | \nonfillstart | ||
6437 | \gobble | ||
6438 | } | ||
6439 | |||
6440 | % @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins. | ||
6441 | % | ||
6442 | \makedispenvdef{format}{% | ||
6443 | \let\nonarrowing = t% | ||
6444 | \nonfillstart | ||
6445 | \gobble | ||
6446 | } | ||
6447 | |||
6448 | % @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize. | ||
6449 | \envdef\flushleft{% | ||
6450 | \let\nonarrowing = t% | ||
6451 | \nonfillstart | ||
6452 | \gobble | ||
6453 | } | ||
6454 | \let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak | ||
6455 | |||
6456 | % @flushright. | ||
6457 | % | ||
6458 | \envdef\flushright{% | ||
6459 | \let\nonarrowing = t% | ||
6460 | \nonfillstart | ||
6461 | \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill\relax | ||
6462 | \gobble | ||
6463 | } | ||
6464 | \let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak | ||
6465 | |||
6466 | |||
6467 | % @raggedright does more-or-less normal line breaking but no right | ||
6468 | % justification. From plain.tex. | ||
6469 | \envdef\raggedright{% | ||
6470 | \rightskip0pt plus2em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em\relax | ||
6471 | } | ||
6472 | \let\Eraggedright\par | ||
6473 | |||
6474 | \envdef\raggedleft{% | ||
6475 | \parindent=0pt \leftskip0pt plus2em | ||
6476 | \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt | ||
6477 | \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off | ||
6478 | % badness reporting. | ||
6479 | } | ||
6480 | \let\Eraggedleft\par | ||
6481 | |||
6482 | \envdef\raggedcenter{% | ||
6483 | \parindent=0pt \rightskip0pt plus1em \leftskip0pt plus1em | ||
6484 | \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt | ||
6485 | \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off | ||
6486 | % badness reporting. | ||
6487 | } | ||
6488 | \let\Eraggedcenter\par | ||
6489 | |||
6490 | |||
6491 | % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) | ||
6492 | % and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since | ||
6493 | % we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and | ||
6494 | % \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0. | ||
6495 | % | ||
6496 | \makedispenvdef{quotation}{\quotationstart} | ||
6497 | % | ||
6498 | \def\quotationstart{% | ||
6499 | {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip | ||
6500 | \parindent=0pt | ||
6501 | % | ||
6502 | % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down. | ||
6503 | \ifx\nonarrowing\relax | ||
6504 | \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing | ||
6505 | \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing | ||
6506 | \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing | ||
6507 | \else | ||
6508 | \let\nonarrowing = \relax | ||
6509 | \fi | ||
6510 | \parsearg\quotationlabel | ||
6511 | } | ||
6512 | |||
6513 | % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're | ||
6514 | % doing normal filling. | ||
6515 | % | ||
6516 | \def\Equotation{% | ||
6517 | \par | ||
6518 | \ifx\quotationauthor\thisisundefined\else | ||
6519 | % indent a bit. | ||
6520 | \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}% | ||
6521 | \fi | ||
6522 | {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% | ||
6523 | } | ||
6524 | \def\Esmallquotation{\Equotation} | ||
6525 | |||
6526 | % If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after. | ||
6527 | \def\quotationlabel#1{% | ||
6528 | \def\temp{#1}% | ||
6529 | \ifx\temp\empty \else | ||
6530 | {\bf #1: }% | ||
6531 | \fi | ||
6532 | } | ||
6533 | |||
6534 | |||
6535 | % LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>} | ||
6536 | % If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter, | ||
6537 | % we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg: | ||
6538 | % `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org | ||
6539 | % | ||
6540 | % [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook. | ||
6541 | % | ||
6542 | % [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets | ||
6543 | % active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a | ||
6544 | % verbatim line. | ||
6545 | \def\dospecials{% | ||
6546 | \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&% | ||
6547 | \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~% | ||
6548 | \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"% | ||
6549 | % Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and | ||
6550 | % @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and | ||
6551 | % @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled. | ||
6552 | %\do\`\do\'% | ||
6553 | } | ||
6554 | % | ||
6555 | % [Knuth] p. 380 | ||
6556 | \def\uncatcodespecials{% | ||
6557 | \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials} | ||
6558 | % | ||
6559 | % Setup for the @verb command. | ||
6560 | % | ||
6561 | % Eight spaces for a tab | ||
6562 | \begingroup | ||
6563 | \catcode`\^^I=\active | ||
6564 | \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }} | ||
6565 | \endgroup | ||
6566 | % | ||
6567 | \def\setupverb{% | ||
6568 | \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim | ||
6569 | \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}% | ||
6570 | \setupmarkupstyle{verb}% | ||
6571 | \tabeightspaces | ||
6572 | % Respect line breaks, | ||
6573 | % print special symbols as themselves, and | ||
6574 | % make each space count | ||
6575 | % must do in this order: | ||
6576 | \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces | ||
6577 | } | ||
6578 | |||
6579 | % Setup for the @verbatim environment | ||
6580 | % | ||
6581 | % Real tab expansion. | ||
6582 | \newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount | ||
6583 | % | ||
6584 | % We typeset each line of the verbatim in an \hbox, so we can handle | ||
6585 | % tabs. The \global is in case the verbatim line starts with an accent, | ||
6586 | % or some other command that starts with a begin-group. Otherwise, the | ||
6587 | % entire \verbbox would disappear at the corresponding end-group, before | ||
6588 | % it is typeset. Meanwhile, we can't have nested verbatim commands | ||
6589 | % (can we?), so the \global won't be overwriting itself. | ||
6590 | \newbox\verbbox | ||
6591 | \def\starttabbox{\global\setbox\verbbox=\hbox\bgroup} | ||
6592 | % | ||
6593 | \begingroup | ||
6594 | \catcode`\^^I=\active | ||
6595 | \gdef\tabexpand{% | ||
6596 | \catcode`\^^I=\active | ||
6597 | \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup | ||
6598 | \dimen\verbbox=\wd\verbbox % the width so far, or since the previous tab | ||
6599 | \divide\dimen\verbbox by\tabw | ||
6600 | \multiply\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw | ||
6601 | \advance\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw | ||
6602 | \wd\verbbox=\dimen\verbbox \box\verbbox \starttabbox | ||
6603 | }% | ||
6604 | } | ||
6605 | \endgroup | ||
6606 | |||
6607 | % start the verbatim environment. | ||
6608 | \def\setupverbatim{% | ||
6609 | \let\nonarrowing = t% | ||
6610 | \nonfillstart | ||
6611 | \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim | ||
6612 | % The \leavevmode here is for blank lines. Otherwise, we would | ||
6613 | % never \starttabox and the \egroup would end verbatim mode. | ||
6614 | \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box\verbbox\endgraf}% | ||
6615 | \tabexpand | ||
6616 | \setupmarkupstyle{verbatim}% | ||
6617 | % Respect line breaks, | ||
6618 | % print special symbols as themselves, and | ||
6619 | % make each space count. | ||
6620 | % Must do in this order: | ||
6621 | \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces | ||
6622 | \everypar{\starttabbox}% | ||
6623 | } | ||
6624 | |||
6625 | % Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique | ||
6626 | % delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a | ||
6627 | % right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace: | ||
6628 | % | ||
6629 | % \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1} | ||
6630 | % | ||
6631 | % [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {} | ||
6632 | \begingroup | ||
6633 | \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other | ||
6634 | \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next] | ||
6635 | \endgroup | ||
6636 | % | ||
6637 | \def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb} | ||
6638 | % | ||
6639 | % | ||
6640 | % Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that | ||
6641 | % the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie: | ||
6642 | % | ||
6643 | % \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1} | ||
6644 | % | ||
6645 | % For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX, | ||
6646 | % because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}': | ||
6647 | % we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'. | ||
6648 | % | ||
6649 | % Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx] | ||
6650 | % | ||
6651 | \begingroup | ||
6652 | \catcode`\ =\active | ||
6653 | \obeylines % | ||
6654 | % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end | ||
6655 | % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank | ||
6656 | % line in the output. | ||
6657 | \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}% | ||
6658 | % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but | ||
6659 | % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble. | ||
6660 | \endgroup | ||
6661 | % | ||
6662 | \envdef\verbatim{% | ||
6663 | \setupverbatim\doverbatim | ||
6664 | } | ||
6665 | \let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak | ||
6666 | |||
6667 | |||
6668 | % @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment. | ||
6669 | % | ||
6670 | \def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude} | ||
6671 | % | ||
6672 | \def\doverbatiminclude#1{% | ||
6673 | {% | ||
6674 | \makevalueexpandable | ||
6675 | \setupverbatim | ||
6676 | \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. | ||
6677 | \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @verbatiminclude of #1^^J}% | ||
6678 | \input #1 | ||
6679 | \afterenvbreak | ||
6680 | }% | ||
6681 | } | ||
6682 | |||
6683 | % @copying ... @end copying. | ||
6684 | % Save the text away for @insertcopying later. | ||
6685 | % | ||
6686 | % We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box. | ||
6687 | % Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the | ||
6688 | % typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done | ||
6689 | % beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source | ||
6690 | % file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as | ||
6691 | % possible is very desirable. | ||
6692 | % | ||
6693 | \def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying} | ||
6694 | \def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}} | ||
6695 | % | ||
6696 | \def\insertcopying{% | ||
6697 | \begingroup | ||
6698 | \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page | ||
6699 | \scanexp\copyingtext | ||
6700 | \endgroup | ||
6701 | } | ||
6702 | |||
6703 | |||
6704 | \message{defuns,} | ||
6705 | % @defun etc. | ||
6706 | |||
6707 | \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in | ||
6708 | \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt | ||
6709 | \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt | ||
6710 | \newcount\defunpenalty | ||
6711 | |||
6712 | % Start the processing of @deffn: | ||
6713 | \def\startdefun{% | ||
6714 | \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 | ||
6715 | \medbreak | ||
6716 | \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the | ||
6717 | % following @def command, see below. | ||
6718 | \else | ||
6719 | % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak, | ||
6720 | % which is there to keep the function description together with its | ||
6721 | % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a | ||
6722 | % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted | ||
6723 | % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning | ||
6724 | % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow | ||
6725 | % a break between a section heading and a defun. | ||
6726 | % | ||
6727 | % As a further refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling | ||
6728 | % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the | ||
6729 | % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following | ||
6730 | % @def command. | ||
6731 | \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi | ||
6732 | % | ||
6733 | % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break. | ||
6734 | % But do insert the glue. | ||
6735 | \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint | ||
6736 | \fi | ||
6737 | % | ||
6738 | \parindent=0in | ||
6739 | \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent | ||
6740 | \exdentamount=\defbodyindent | ||
6741 | } | ||
6742 | |||
6743 | \def\dodefunx#1{% | ||
6744 | % First, check whether we are in the right environment: | ||
6745 | \checkenv#1% | ||
6746 | % | ||
6747 | % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row. | ||
6748 | % It's not a great place, though. | ||
6749 | \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi | ||
6750 | % | ||
6751 | % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun: | ||
6752 | \expandafter\gobbledefun#1% | ||
6753 | } | ||
6754 | \def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{} | ||
6755 | |||
6756 | % \printdefunline \deffnheader{text} | ||
6757 | % | ||
6758 | \def\printdefunline#1#2{% | ||
6759 | \begingroup | ||
6760 | % call \deffnheader: | ||
6761 | #1#2 \endheader | ||
6762 | % common ending: | ||
6763 | \interlinepenalty = 10000 | ||
6764 | \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil\relax | ||
6765 | \endgraf | ||
6766 | \nobreak\vskip -\parskip | ||
6767 | \penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx | ||
6768 | % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses, | ||
6769 | % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize. | ||
6770 | \checkparencounts | ||
6771 | \endgroup | ||
6772 | } | ||
6773 | |||
6774 | \def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak} | ||
6775 | |||
6776 | % \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn; | ||
6777 | % the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader. | ||
6778 | % | ||
6779 | \def\makedefun#1{% | ||
6780 | \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun | ||
6781 | \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun | ||
6782 | \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}% | ||
6783 | \temp | ||
6784 | } | ||
6785 | |||
6786 | % \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader | ||
6787 | % | ||
6788 | % Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters. | ||
6789 | % \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly. | ||
6790 | % | ||
6791 | \def\domakedefun#1#2#3{% | ||
6792 | \envdef#1{% | ||
6793 | \startdefun | ||
6794 | \doingtypefnfalse % distinguish typed functions from all else | ||
6795 | \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}% | ||
6796 | }% | ||
6797 | \def#2{\dodefunx#1}% | ||
6798 | \def#3% | ||
6799 | } | ||
6800 | |||
6801 | \newif\ifdoingtypefn % doing typed function? | ||
6802 | \newif\ifrettypeownline % typeset return type on its own line? | ||
6803 | |||
6804 | % @deftypefnnewline on|off says whether the return type of typed functions | ||
6805 | % are printed on their own line. This affects @deftypefn, @deftypefun, | ||
6806 | % @deftypeop, and @deftypemethod. | ||
6807 | % | ||
6808 | \parseargdef\deftypefnnewline{% | ||
6809 | \def\temp{#1}% | ||
6810 | \ifx\temp\onword | ||
6811 | \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname | ||
6812 | = \empty | ||
6813 | \else\ifx\temp\offword | ||
6814 | \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname | ||
6815 | = \relax | ||
6816 | \else | ||
6817 | \errhelp = \EMsimple | ||
6818 | \errmessage{Unknown @txideftypefnnl value `\temp', | ||
6819 | must be on|off}% | ||
6820 | \fi\fi | ||
6821 | } | ||
6822 | |||
6823 | % Untyped functions: | ||
6824 | |||
6825 | % @deffn category name args | ||
6826 | \makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}} | ||
6827 | |||
6828 | % @deffn category class name args | ||
6829 | \makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}} | ||
6830 | |||
6831 | % \defopon {category on}class name args | ||
6832 | \def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } | ||
6833 | |||
6834 | % \deffngeneral {subind}category name args | ||
6835 | % | ||
6836 | \def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{% | ||
6837 | % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}. | ||
6838 | \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}% | ||
6839 | \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}% | ||
6840 | } | ||
6841 | |||
6842 | % Typed functions: | ||
6843 | |||
6844 | % @deftypefn category type name args | ||
6845 | \makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}} | ||
6846 | |||
6847 | % @deftypeop category class type name args | ||
6848 | \makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}} | ||
6849 | |||
6850 | % \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args | ||
6851 | \def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } | ||
6852 | |||
6853 | % \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args | ||
6854 | % | ||
6855 | \def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% | ||
6856 | \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}% | ||
6857 | \doingtypefntrue | ||
6858 | \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% | ||
6859 | } | ||
6860 | |||
6861 | % Typed variables: | ||
6862 | |||
6863 | % @deftypevr category type var args | ||
6864 | \makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}} | ||
6865 | |||
6866 | % @deftypecv category class type var args | ||
6867 | \makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}} | ||
6868 | |||
6869 | % \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args | ||
6870 | \def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } | ||
6871 | |||
6872 | % \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args | ||
6873 | % | ||
6874 | \def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% | ||
6875 | \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}% | ||
6876 | \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% | ||
6877 | } | ||
6878 | |||
6879 | % Untyped variables: | ||
6880 | |||
6881 | % @defvr category var args | ||
6882 | \makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} } | ||
6883 | |||
6884 | % @defcv category class var args | ||
6885 | \makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}} | ||
6886 | |||
6887 | % \defcvof {category of}class var args | ||
6888 | \def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} } | ||
6889 | |||
6890 | % Types: | ||
6891 | |||
6892 | % @deftp category name args | ||
6893 | \makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{% | ||
6894 | \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}% | ||
6895 | \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}% | ||
6896 | } | ||
6897 | |||
6898 | % Remaining @defun-like shortcuts: | ||
6899 | \makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } | ||
6900 | \makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} } | ||
6901 | \makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} } | ||
6902 | \makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } | ||
6903 | \makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} } | ||
6904 | \makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} } | ||
6905 | \makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} } | ||
6906 | \makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon} | ||
6907 | \makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon} | ||
6908 | \makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} | ||
6909 | \makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} | ||
6910 | |||
6911 | % \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args). | ||
6912 | % #1 is the category, such as "Function". | ||
6913 | % #2 is the return type, if any. | ||
6914 | % #3 is the function name. | ||
6915 | % | ||
6916 | % We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any. | ||
6917 | % | ||
6918 | \def\defname#1#2#3{% | ||
6919 | \par | ||
6920 | % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def... | ||
6921 | \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent | ||
6922 | % | ||
6923 | % Determine if we are typesetting the return type of a typed function | ||
6924 | % on a line by itself. | ||
6925 | \rettypeownlinefalse | ||
6926 | \ifdoingtypefn % doing a typed function specifically? | ||
6927 | % then check user option for putting return type on its own line: | ||
6928 | \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname\relax \else | ||
6929 | \rettypeownlinetrue | ||
6930 | \fi | ||
6931 | \fi | ||
6932 | % | ||
6933 | % How we'll format the category name. Putting it in brackets helps | ||
6934 | % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line | ||
6935 | % just below it. | ||
6936 | \def\temp{#1}% | ||
6937 | \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi} | ||
6938 | % | ||
6939 | % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. We'll always have at | ||
6940 | % least two. | ||
6941 | \tempnum = 2 | ||
6942 | % | ||
6943 | % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero, | ||
6944 | % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it: | ||
6945 | \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip | ||
6946 | % | ||
6947 | % If doing a return type on its own line, we'll have another line. | ||
6948 | \ifrettypeownline | ||
6949 | \advance\tempnum by 1 | ||
6950 | \def\maybeshapeline{0in \hsize}% | ||
6951 | \else | ||
6952 | \def\maybeshapeline{}% | ||
6953 | \fi | ||
6954 | % | ||
6955 | % The continuations: | ||
6956 | \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent | ||
6957 | % | ||
6958 | % The final paragraph shape: | ||
6959 | \parshape \tempnum 0in \dimen0 \maybeshapeline \defargsindent \dimen2 | ||
6960 | % | ||
6961 | % Put the category name at the right margin. | ||
6962 | \noindent | ||
6963 | \hbox to 0pt{% | ||
6964 | \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize | ||
6965 | % \hsize has to be shortened this way: | ||
6966 | \kern\leftskip | ||
6967 | % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space. | ||
6968 | }% | ||
6969 | % | ||
6970 | % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint: | ||
6971 | \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 | ||
6972 | \exdentamount=\defbodyindent | ||
6973 | {% | ||
6974 | % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because: | ||
6975 | % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle. | ||
6976 | % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's | ||
6977 | % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in | ||
6978 | % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm. | ||
6979 | % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures. | ||
6980 | % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no | ||
6981 | % one has made identifiers using them :). | ||
6982 | \df \tt | ||
6983 | \def\temp{#2}% text of the return type | ||
6984 | \ifx\temp\empty\else | ||
6985 | \tclose{\temp}% typeset the return type | ||
6986 | \ifrettypeownline | ||
6987 | % put return type on its own line; prohibit line break following: | ||
6988 | \hfil\vadjust{\nobreak}\break | ||
6989 | \else | ||
6990 | \space % type on same line, so just followed by a space | ||
6991 | \fi | ||
6992 | \fi % no return type | ||
6993 | #3% output function name | ||
6994 | }% | ||
6995 | {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm | ||
6996 | % | ||
6997 | \boldbrax | ||
6998 | % arguments will be output next, if any. | ||
6999 | } | ||
7000 | |||
7001 | % Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using | ||
7002 | % tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in | ||
7003 | % the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very | ||
7004 | % distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars. | ||
7005 | % | ||
7006 | \def\defunargs#1{% | ||
7007 | % use sl by default (not ttsl), | ||
7008 | % tt for the names. | ||
7009 | \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0 | ||
7010 | % | ||
7011 | % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we | ||
7012 | % want a way to get ttsl. Let's try @var for that. | ||
7013 | \def\var##1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\ttslanted{##1}}}% | ||
7014 | #1% | ||
7015 | \sl\hyphenchar\font=45 | ||
7016 | } | ||
7017 | |||
7018 | % We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line. | ||
7019 | % | ||
7020 | \def\activeparens{% | ||
7021 | \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active | ||
7022 | \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active | ||
7023 | \catcode`\&=\active | ||
7024 | } | ||
7025 | |||
7026 | % Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars. | ||
7027 | \let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = ) | ||
7028 | |||
7029 | % Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example, | ||
7030 | % if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet, | ||
7031 | % so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence. | ||
7032 | { | ||
7033 | \activeparens | ||
7034 | \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen | ||
7035 | \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack | ||
7036 | \global\let& = \& | ||
7037 | |||
7038 | \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} | ||
7039 | \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm} | ||
7040 | } | ||
7041 | |||
7042 | \newcount\parencount | ||
7043 | |||
7044 | % If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards | ||
7045 | \newif\ifampseen | ||
7046 | \def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }} | ||
7047 | |||
7048 | \def\parenfont{% | ||
7049 | \ifampseen | ||
7050 | % At the first level, print parens in roman, | ||
7051 | % otherwise use the default font. | ||
7052 | \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi | ||
7053 | \else | ||
7054 | % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than | ||
7055 | % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] . | ||
7056 | \sf | ||
7057 | \fi | ||
7058 | } | ||
7059 | \def\infirstlevel#1{% | ||
7060 | \ifampseen | ||
7061 | \ifnum\parencount=1 | ||
7062 | #1% | ||
7063 | \fi | ||
7064 | \fi | ||
7065 | } | ||
7066 | \def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf} | ||
7067 | |||
7068 | \def\opnr{% | ||
7069 | \global\advance\parencount by 1 | ||
7070 | {\parenfont(}% | ||
7071 | \infirstlevel \bfafterword | ||
7072 | } | ||
7073 | \def\clnr{% | ||
7074 | {\parenfont)}% | ||
7075 | \infirstlevel \sl | ||
7076 | \global\advance\parencount by -1 | ||
7077 | } | ||
7078 | |||
7079 | \newcount\brackcount | ||
7080 | \def\lbrb{% | ||
7081 | \global\advance\brackcount by 1 | ||
7082 | {\bf[}% | ||
7083 | } | ||
7084 | \def\rbrb{% | ||
7085 | {\bf]}% | ||
7086 | \global\advance\brackcount by -1 | ||
7087 | } | ||
7088 | |||
7089 | \def\checkparencounts{% | ||
7090 | \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi | ||
7091 | \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi | ||
7092 | } | ||
7093 | % these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually | ||
7094 | % has such constructs (when documenting function pointers). | ||
7095 | \def\badparencount{% | ||
7096 | \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}% | ||
7097 | \global\parencount=0 | ||
7098 | } | ||
7099 | \def\badbrackcount{% | ||
7100 | \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}% | ||
7101 | \global\brackcount=0 | ||
7102 | } | ||
7103 | |||
7104 | |||
7105 | \message{macros,} | ||
7106 | % @macro. | ||
7107 | |||
7108 | % To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens, | ||
7109 | % which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX. | ||
7110 | \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined | ||
7111 | \newwrite\macscribble | ||
7112 | \def\scantokens#1{% | ||
7113 | \toks0={#1}% | ||
7114 | \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp | ||
7115 | \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}% | ||
7116 | \immediate\closeout\macscribble | ||
7117 | \input \jobname.tmp | ||
7118 | } | ||
7119 | \fi | ||
7120 | |||
7121 | \def\scanmacro#1{\begingroup | ||
7122 | \newlinechar`\^^M | ||
7123 | \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces | ||
7124 | % | ||
7125 | % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex | ||
7126 | % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active | ||
7127 | % backslash to get it printed correctly. Previously, we had | ||
7128 | % \catcode`\\=\other instead. We'll see whether a problem appears | ||
7129 | % with macro expansion. --kasal, 19aug04 | ||
7130 | \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@ | ||
7131 | % | ||
7132 | % ... and for \example: | ||
7133 | \spaceisspace | ||
7134 | % | ||
7135 | % The \empty here causes a following catcode 5 newline to be eaten as | ||
7136 | % part of reading whitespace after a control sequence. It does not | ||
7137 | % eat a catcode 13 newline. There's no good way to handle the two | ||
7138 | % cases (untried: maybe e-TeX's \everyeof could help, though plain TeX | ||
7139 | % would then have different behavior). See the Macro Details node in | ||
7140 | % the manual for the workaround we recommend for macros and | ||
7141 | % line-oriented commands. | ||
7142 | % | ||
7143 | \scantokens{#1\empty}% | ||
7144 | \endgroup} | ||
7145 | |||
7146 | \def\scanexp#1{% | ||
7147 | \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}% | ||
7148 | \temp | ||
7149 | } | ||
7150 | |||
7151 | \newcount\paramno % Count of parameters | ||
7152 | \newtoks\macname % Macro name | ||
7153 | \newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive? | ||
7154 | |||
7155 | % List of all defined macros in the form | ||
7156 | % \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2... | ||
7157 | % Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split | ||
7158 | % if there is a need. | ||
7159 | \def\macrolist{} | ||
7160 | |||
7161 | % Add the macro to \macrolist | ||
7162 | \def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname} | ||
7163 | \def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{% | ||
7164 | \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}% | ||
7165 | \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}% | ||
7166 | } | ||
7167 | |||
7168 | % Utility routines. | ||
7169 | % This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is, | ||
7170 | % \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname | ||
7171 | % (except of course we have to play expansion games). | ||
7172 | % | ||
7173 | \def\cslet#1#2{% | ||
7174 | \expandafter\let | ||
7175 | \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname | ||
7176 | \csname#2\endcsname | ||
7177 | } | ||
7178 | |||
7179 | % Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string. | ||
7180 | % Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN). | ||
7181 | {\catcode`\@=11 | ||
7182 | \gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }} | ||
7183 | \gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@} | ||
7184 | \gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @} | ||
7185 | \def\unbrace#1{#1} | ||
7186 | \unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1} | ||
7187 | } | ||
7188 | |||
7189 | % Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string. | ||
7190 | {\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3% | ||
7191 | \gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}% | ||
7192 | \gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}% | ||
7193 | \gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}% | ||
7194 | } | ||
7195 | |||
7196 | % Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where | ||
7197 | % all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active | ||
7198 | % (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \ | ||
7199 | % to recognize macro arguments; this is the job of \mbodybackslash. | ||
7200 | % | ||
7201 | % Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate | ||
7202 | % them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to | ||
7203 | % confine the change to the current group. | ||
7204 | % | ||
7205 | % It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is | ||
7206 | % done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro | ||
7207 | % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro. | ||
7208 | % | ||
7209 | \def\scanctxt{% used as subroutine | ||
7210 | \catcode`\"=\other | ||
7211 | \catcode`\+=\other | ||
7212 | \catcode`\<=\other | ||
7213 | \catcode`\>=\other | ||
7214 | \catcode`\@=\other | ||
7215 | \catcode`\^=\other | ||
7216 | \catcode`\_=\other | ||
7217 | \catcode`\|=\other | ||
7218 | \catcode`\~=\other | ||
7219 | \ifx\declaredencoding\ascii \else \setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal\other \fi | ||
7220 | } | ||
7221 | |||
7222 | \def\scanargctxt{% used for copying and captions, not macros. | ||
7223 | \scanctxt | ||
7224 | \catcode`\\=\other | ||
7225 | \catcode`\^^M=\other | ||
7226 | } | ||
7227 | |||
7228 | \def\macrobodyctxt{% used for @macro definitions | ||
7229 | \scanctxt | ||
7230 | \catcode`\{=\other | ||
7231 | \catcode`\}=\other | ||
7232 | \catcode`\^^M=\other | ||
7233 | \usembodybackslash | ||
7234 | } | ||
7235 | |||
7236 | \def\macroargctxt{% used when scanning invocations | ||
7237 | \scanctxt | ||
7238 | \catcode`\\=0 | ||
7239 | } | ||
7240 | % why catcode 0 for \ in the above? To recognize \\ \{ \} as "escapes" | ||
7241 | % for the single characters \ { }. Thus, we end up with the "commands" | ||
7242 | % that would be written @\ @{ @} in a Texinfo document. | ||
7243 | % | ||
7244 | % We already have @{ and @}. For @\, we define it here, and only for | ||
7245 | % this purpose, to produce a typewriter backslash (so, the @\ that we | ||
7246 | % define for @math can't be used with @macro calls): | ||
7247 | % | ||
7248 | \def\\{\normalbackslash}% | ||
7249 | % | ||
7250 | % We would like to do this for \, too, since that is what makeinfo does. | ||
7251 | % But it is not possible, because Texinfo already has a command @, for a | ||
7252 | % cedilla accent. Documents must use @comma{} instead. | ||
7253 | % | ||
7254 | % \anythingelse will almost certainly be an error of some kind. | ||
7255 | |||
7256 | |||
7257 | % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies. | ||
7258 | % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N | ||
7259 | % where N is the macro parameter number. | ||
7260 | % We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so | ||
7261 | % \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash. | ||
7262 | % | ||
7263 | {\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active | ||
7264 | @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash} | ||
7265 | @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname} | ||
7266 | } | ||
7267 | \expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash} | ||
7268 | |||
7269 | \def\margbackslash#1{\char`\#1 } | ||
7270 | |||
7271 | \def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx} | ||
7272 | \def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx} | ||
7273 | |||
7274 | \def\macroxxx#1{% | ||
7275 | \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist | ||
7276 | \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments | ||
7277 | \paramno=0\relax | ||
7278 | \else | ||
7279 | \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;% | ||
7280 | \if\paramno>256\relax | ||
7281 | \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined | ||
7282 | \errhelp = \EMsimple | ||
7283 | \errmessage{You need eTeX to compile a file with macros with more than 256 arguments} | ||
7284 | \fi | ||
7285 | \fi | ||
7286 | \fi | ||
7287 | \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname | ||
7288 | \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}% | ||
7289 | \else | ||
7290 | \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax | ||
7291 | \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi | ||
7292 | \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}% | ||
7293 | \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1% | ||
7294 | \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}% | ||
7295 | \fi | ||
7296 | \begingroup \macrobodyctxt | ||
7297 | \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody | ||
7298 | \else \expandafter\parsemacbody | ||
7299 | \fi} | ||
7300 | |||
7301 | \parseargdef\unmacro{% | ||
7302 | \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname | ||
7303 | \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}% | ||
7304 | \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0% | ||
7305 | % Remove the macro name from \macrolist: | ||
7306 | \begingroup | ||
7307 | \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax | ||
7308 | \let\definedummyword\unmacrodo | ||
7309 | \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}% | ||
7310 | \endgroup | ||
7311 | \else | ||
7312 | \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}% | ||
7313 | \fi | ||
7314 | } | ||
7315 | |||
7316 | % Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any | ||
7317 | % macro definitions that have been changed to \relax. | ||
7318 | % | ||
7319 | \def\unmacrodo#1{% | ||
7320 | \ifx #1\relax | ||
7321 | % remove this | ||
7322 | \else | ||
7323 | \noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1% | ||
7324 | \fi | ||
7325 | } | ||
7326 | |||
7327 | % This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a | ||
7328 | % <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by | ||
7329 | % an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed. | ||
7330 | \def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}} | ||
7331 | \def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs} | ||
7332 | \def\getmacname#1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}} | ||
7333 | \def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}} | ||
7334 | |||
7335 | % For macro processing make @ a letter so that we can make Texinfo private macro names. | ||
7336 | \edef\texiatcatcode{\the\catcode`\@} | ||
7337 | \catcode `@=11\relax | ||
7338 | |||
7339 | % Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist | ||
7340 | % so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.BLAH for each BLAH | ||
7341 | % in the params list to some hook where the argument si to be expanded. If | ||
7342 | % there are less than 10 arguments that hook is to be replaced by ##N where N | ||
7343 | % is the position in that list, that is to say the macro arguments are to be | ||
7344 | % defined `a la TeX in the macro body. | ||
7345 | % | ||
7346 | % That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above). | ||
7347 | % | ||
7348 | % We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions. | ||
7349 | % The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something | ||
7350 | % unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine | ||
7351 | % it to # just before using the token list produced. | ||
7352 | % | ||
7353 | % The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before | ||
7354 | % the macro is used. | ||
7355 | % | ||
7356 | % If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used, where the | ||
7357 | % hook remains in the body, and when macro is to be expanded the body is | ||
7358 | % processed again to replace the arguments. | ||
7359 | % | ||
7360 | % In that case, the hook is \the\toks N-1, and we simply set \toks N-1 to the | ||
7361 | % argument N value and then \edef the body (nothing else will expand because of | ||
7362 | % the catcode regime underwhich the body was input). | ||
7363 | % | ||
7364 | % If you compile with TeX (not eTeX), and you have macros with 10 or more | ||
7365 | % arguments, you need that no macro has more than 256 arguments, otherwise an | ||
7366 | % error is produced. | ||
7367 | \def\parsemargdef#1;{% | ||
7368 | \paramno=0\def\paramlist{}% | ||
7369 | \let\hash\relax | ||
7370 | \let\xeatspaces\relax | ||
7371 | \parsemargdefxxx#1,;,% | ||
7372 | % In case that there are 10 or more arguments we parse again the arguments | ||
7373 | % list to set new definitions for the \macarg.BLAH macros corresponding to | ||
7374 | % each BLAH argument. It was anyhow needed to parse already once this list | ||
7375 | % in order to count the arguments, and as macros with at most 9 arguments | ||
7376 | % are by far more frequent than macro with 10 or more arguments, defining | ||
7377 | % twice the \macarg.BLAH macros does not cost too much processing power. | ||
7378 | \ifnum\paramno<10\relax\else | ||
7379 | \paramno0\relax | ||
7380 | \parsemmanyargdef@@#1,;,% 10 or more arguments | ||
7381 | \fi | ||
7382 | } | ||
7383 | \def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{% | ||
7384 | \if#1;\let\next=\relax | ||
7385 | \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx | ||
7386 | \advance\paramno by 1 | ||
7387 | \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname | ||
7388 | {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}% | ||
7389 | \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}% | ||
7390 | \fi\next} | ||
7391 | |||
7392 | \def\parsemmanyargdef@@#1,{% | ||
7393 | \if#1;\let\next=\relax | ||
7394 | \else | ||
7395 | \let\next=\parsemmanyargdef@@ | ||
7396 | \edef\tempb{\eatspaces{#1}}% | ||
7397 | \expandafter\def\expandafter\tempa | ||
7398 | \expandafter{\csname macarg.\tempb\endcsname}% | ||
7399 | % Note that we need some extra \noexpand\noexpand, this is because we | ||
7400 | % don't want \the to be expanded in the \parsermacbody as it uses an | ||
7401 | % \xdef . | ||
7402 | \expandafter\edef\tempa | ||
7403 | {\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\the\toks\the\paramno}% | ||
7404 | \advance\paramno by 1\relax | ||
7405 | \fi\next} | ||
7406 | |||
7407 | % These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. | ||
7408 | % (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.) | ||
7409 | % | ||
7410 | |||
7411 | \catcode `\@\texiatcatcode | ||
7412 | \long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro% | ||
7413 | {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% | ||
7414 | \long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro% | ||
7415 | {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% | ||
7416 | \catcode `\@=11\relax | ||
7417 | |||
7418 | \let\endargs@\relax | ||
7419 | \let\nil@\relax | ||
7420 | \def\nilm@{\nil@}% | ||
7421 | \long\def\nillm@{\nil@}% | ||
7422 | |||
7423 | % This macro is expanded during the Texinfo macro expansion, not during its | ||
7424 | % definition. It gets all the arguments values and assigns them to macros | ||
7425 | % macarg.ARGNAME | ||
7426 | % | ||
7427 | % #1 is the macro name | ||
7428 | % #2 is the list of argument names | ||
7429 | % #3 is the list of argument values | ||
7430 | \def\getargvals@#1#2#3{% | ||
7431 | \def\macargdeflist@{}% | ||
7432 | \def\saveparamlist@{#2}% Need to keep a copy for parameter expansion. | ||
7433 | \def\paramlist{#2,\nil@}% | ||
7434 | \def\macroname{#1}% | ||
7435 | \begingroup | ||
7436 | \macroargctxt | ||
7437 | \def\argvaluelist{#3,\nil@}% | ||
7438 | \def\@tempa{#3}% | ||
7439 | \ifx\@tempa\empty | ||
7440 | \setemptyargvalues@ | ||
7441 | \else | ||
7442 | \getargvals@@ | ||
7443 | \fi | ||
7444 | } | ||
7445 | |||
7446 | % | ||
7447 | \def\getargvals@@{% | ||
7448 | \ifx\paramlist\nilm@ | ||
7449 | % Some sanity check needed here that \argvaluelist is also empty. | ||
7450 | \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@ | ||
7451 | \else | ||
7452 | \errhelp = \EMsimple | ||
7453 | \errmessage{Too many arguments in macro `\macroname'!}% | ||
7454 | \fi | ||
7455 | \let\next\macargexpandinbody@ | ||
7456 | \else | ||
7457 | \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@ | ||
7458 | % No more arguments values passed to macro. Set remaining named-arg | ||
7459 | % macros to empty. | ||
7460 | \let\next\setemptyargvalues@ | ||
7461 | \else | ||
7462 | % pop current arg name into \@tempb | ||
7463 | \def\@tempa##1{\pop@{\@tempb}{\paramlist}##1\endargs@}% | ||
7464 | \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\paramlist}% | ||
7465 | % pop current argument value into \@tempc | ||
7466 | \def\@tempa##1{\longpop@{\@tempc}{\argvaluelist}##1\endargs@}% | ||
7467 | \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\argvaluelist}% | ||
7468 | % Here \@tempb is the current arg name and \@tempc is the current arg value. | ||
7469 | % First place the new argument macro definition into \@tempd | ||
7470 | \expandafter\macname\expandafter{\@tempc}% | ||
7471 | \expandafter\let\csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname\relax | ||
7472 | \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempe\expandafter{% | ||
7473 | \csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname}% | ||
7474 | \edef\@tempd{\long\def\@tempe{\the\macname}}% | ||
7475 | \push@\@tempd\macargdeflist@ | ||
7476 | \let\next\getargvals@@ | ||
7477 | \fi | ||
7478 | \fi | ||
7479 | \next | ||
7480 | } | ||
7481 | |||
7482 | \def\push@#1#2{% | ||
7483 | \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def | ||
7484 | \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter#2% | ||
7485 | \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{% | ||
7486 | \expandafter#1#2}% | ||
7487 | } | ||
7488 | |||
7489 | % Replace arguments by their values in the macro body, and place the result | ||
7490 | % in macro \@tempa | ||
7491 | \def\macvalstoargs@{% | ||
7492 | % To do this we use the property that token registers that are \the'ed | ||
7493 | % within an \edef expand only once. So we are going to place all argument | ||
7494 | % values into respective token registers. | ||
7495 | % | ||
7496 | % First we save the token context, and initialize argument numbering. | ||
7497 | \begingroup | ||
7498 | \paramno0\relax | ||
7499 | % Then, for each argument number #N, we place the corresponding argument | ||
7500 | % value into a new token list register \toks#N | ||
7501 | \expandafter\putargsintokens@\saveparamlist@,;,% | ||
7502 | % Then, we expand the body so that argument are replaced by their | ||
7503 | % values. The trick for values not to be expanded themselves is that they | ||
7504 | % are within tokens and that tokens expand only once in an \edef . | ||
7505 | \edef\@tempc{\csname mac.\macroname .body\endcsname}% | ||
7506 | % Now we restore the token stack pointer to free the token list registers | ||
7507 | % which we have used, but we make sure that expanded body is saved after | ||
7508 | % group. | ||
7509 | \expandafter | ||
7510 | \endgroup | ||
7511 | \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempc}% | ||
7512 | } | ||
7513 | |||
7514 | \def\macargexpandinbody@{% | ||
7515 | %% Define the named-macro outside of this group and then close this group. | ||
7516 | \expandafter | ||
7517 | \endgroup | ||
7518 | \macargdeflist@ | ||
7519 | % First the replace in body the macro arguments by their values, the result | ||
7520 | % is in \@tempa . | ||
7521 | \macvalstoargs@ | ||
7522 | % Then we point at the \norecurse or \gobble (for recursive) macro value | ||
7523 | % with \@tempb . | ||
7524 | \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempb\csname mac.\macroname .recurse\endcsname | ||
7525 | % Depending on whether it is recursive or not, we need some tailing | ||
7526 | % \egroup . | ||
7527 | \ifx\@tempb\gobble | ||
7528 | \let\@tempc\relax | ||
7529 | \else | ||
7530 | \let\@tempc\egroup | ||
7531 | \fi | ||
7532 | % And now we do the real job: | ||
7533 | \edef\@tempd{\noexpand\@tempb{\macroname}\noexpand\scanmacro{\@tempa}\@tempc}% | ||
7534 | \@tempd | ||
7535 | } | ||
7536 | |||
7537 | \def\putargsintokens@#1,{% | ||
7538 | \if#1;\let\next\relax | ||
7539 | \else | ||
7540 | \let\next\putargsintokens@ | ||
7541 | % First we allocate the new token list register, and give it a temporary | ||
7542 | % alias \@tempb . | ||
7543 | \toksdef\@tempb\the\paramno | ||
7544 | % Then we place the argument value into that token list register. | ||
7545 | \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname macarg.#1\endcsname | ||
7546 | \expandafter\@tempb\expandafter{\@tempa}% | ||
7547 | \advance\paramno by 1\relax | ||
7548 | \fi | ||
7549 | \next | ||
7550 | } | ||
7551 | |||
7552 | % Save the token stack pointer into macro #1 | ||
7553 | \def\texisavetoksstackpoint#1{\edef#1{\the\@cclvi}} | ||
7554 | % Restore the token stack pointer from number in macro #1 | ||
7555 | \def\texirestoretoksstackpoint#1{\expandafter\mathchardef\expandafter\@cclvi#1\relax} | ||
7556 | % newtoks that can be used non \outer . | ||
7557 | \def\texinonouternewtoks{\alloc@ 5\toks \toksdef \@cclvi} | ||
7558 | |||
7559 | % Tailing missing arguments are set to empty | ||
7560 | \def\setemptyargvalues@{% | ||
7561 | \ifx\paramlist\nilm@ | ||
7562 | \let\next\macargexpandinbody@ | ||
7563 | \else | ||
7564 | \expandafter\setemptyargvaluesparser@\paramlist\endargs@ | ||
7565 | \let\next\setemptyargvalues@ | ||
7566 | \fi | ||
7567 | \next | ||
7568 | } | ||
7569 | |||
7570 | \def\setemptyargvaluesparser@#1,#2\endargs@{% | ||
7571 | \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{% | ||
7572 | \expandafter\def\csname macarg.#1\endcsname{}}% | ||
7573 | \push@\@tempa\macargdeflist@ | ||
7574 | \def\paramlist{#2}% | ||
7575 | } | ||
7576 | |||
7577 | % #1 is the element target macro | ||
7578 | % #2 is the list macro | ||
7579 | % #3,#4\endargs@ is the list value | ||
7580 | \def\pop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{% | ||
7581 | \def#1{#3}% | ||
7582 | \def#2{#4}% | ||
7583 | } | ||
7584 | \long\def\longpop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{% | ||
7585 | \long\def#1{#3}% | ||
7586 | \long\def#2{#4}% | ||
7587 | } | ||
7588 | |||
7589 | % This defines a Texinfo @macro. There are eight cases: recursive and | ||
7590 | % nonrecursive macros of zero, one, up to nine, and many arguments. | ||
7591 | % Much magic with \expandafter here. | ||
7592 | % \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file | ||
7593 | % they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group. | ||
7594 | % | ||
7595 | \def\defmacro{% | ||
7596 | \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars | ||
7597 | \ifrecursive | ||
7598 | \ifcase\paramno | ||
7599 | % 0 | ||
7600 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | ||
7601 | \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% | ||
7602 | \or % 1 | ||
7603 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | ||
7604 | \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt | ||
7605 | \noexpand\braceorline | ||
7606 | \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% | ||
7607 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% | ||
7608 | \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% | ||
7609 | \else | ||
7610 | \ifnum\paramno<10\relax % at most 9 | ||
7611 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | ||
7612 | \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt | ||
7613 | \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% | ||
7614 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% | ||
7615 | \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% | ||
7616 | \expandafter\expandafter | ||
7617 | \expandafter\xdef | ||
7618 | \expandafter\expandafter | ||
7619 | \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname | ||
7620 | \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% | ||
7621 | \else % 10 or more | ||
7622 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | ||
7623 | \noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}% | ||
7624 | }% | ||
7625 | \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\temp | ||
7626 | \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\gobble | ||
7627 | \fi | ||
7628 | \fi | ||
7629 | \else | ||
7630 | \ifcase\paramno | ||
7631 | % 0 | ||
7632 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | ||
7633 | \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% | ||
7634 | \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% | ||
7635 | \or % 1 | ||
7636 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | ||
7637 | \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt | ||
7638 | \noexpand\braceorline | ||
7639 | \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% | ||
7640 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% | ||
7641 | \egroup | ||
7642 | \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% | ||
7643 | \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% | ||
7644 | \else % at most 9 | ||
7645 | \ifnum\paramno<10\relax | ||
7646 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | ||
7647 | \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt | ||
7648 | \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% | ||
7649 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% | ||
7650 | \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% | ||
7651 | \expandafter\expandafter | ||
7652 | \expandafter\xdef | ||
7653 | \expandafter\expandafter | ||
7654 | \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname | ||
7655 | \paramlist{% | ||
7656 | \egroup | ||
7657 | \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% | ||
7658 | \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% | ||
7659 | \else % 10 or more: | ||
7660 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | ||
7661 | \noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}% | ||
7662 | }% | ||
7663 | \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\temp | ||
7664 | \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\norecurse | ||
7665 | \fi | ||
7666 | \fi | ||
7667 | \fi} | ||
7668 | |||
7669 | \catcode `\@\texiatcatcode\relax | ||
7670 | |||
7671 | \def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}} | ||
7672 | |||
7673 | % \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a | ||
7674 | % {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole | ||
7675 | % line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence | ||
7676 | % as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg). | ||
7677 | % | ||
7678 | \def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx} | ||
7679 | \def\braceorlinexxx{% | ||
7680 | \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else | ||
7681 | \expandafter\parsearg | ||
7682 | \fi \macnamexxx} | ||
7683 | |||
7684 | |||
7685 | % @alias. | ||
7686 | % We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal | ||
7687 | % sign. Make them active and then expand them all to nothing. | ||
7688 | % | ||
7689 | \def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx} | ||
7690 | \def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax} | ||
7691 | \def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{% | ||
7692 | {% | ||
7693 | \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty | ||
7694 | \addtomacrolist{#1}% | ||
7695 | \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}% | ||
7696 | }% | ||
7697 | \next | ||
7698 | } | ||
7699 | |||
7700 | |||
7701 | \message{cross references,} | ||
7702 | |||
7703 | \newwrite\auxfile | ||
7704 | \newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known. | ||
7705 | \newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known. | ||
7706 | |||
7707 | % @inforef is relatively simple. | ||
7708 | \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} | ||
7709 | \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{% | ||
7710 | \putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, | ||
7711 | node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} | ||
7712 | |||
7713 | % @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in | ||
7714 | % cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and | ||
7715 | % might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like: | ||
7716 | % @node foo , bar , ... | ||
7717 | % We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name. | ||
7718 | % | ||
7719 | \parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse} | ||
7720 | % | ||
7721 | % also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this: | ||
7722 | % @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs | ||
7723 | \def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse} | ||
7724 | \def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}} | ||
7725 | |||
7726 | \let\nwnode=\node | ||
7727 | \let\lastnode=\empty | ||
7728 | |||
7729 | % Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the | ||
7730 | % type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing). | ||
7731 | % | ||
7732 | \def\donoderef#1{% | ||
7733 | \ifx\lastnode\empty\else | ||
7734 | \setref{\lastnode}{#1}% | ||
7735 | \global\let\lastnode=\empty | ||
7736 | \fi | ||
7737 | } | ||
7738 | |||
7739 | % @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point. | ||
7740 | % | ||
7741 | \newcount\savesfregister | ||
7742 | % | ||
7743 | \def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi} | ||
7744 | \def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi} | ||
7745 | \def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces} | ||
7746 | |||
7747 | % \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an | ||
7748 | % anchor), which consists of three parts: | ||
7749 | % 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \lastsection, | ||
7750 | % or the anchor name. | ||
7751 | % 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or | ||
7752 | % empty for anchors. | ||
7753 | % 3) NAME-pg - the page number. | ||
7754 | % | ||
7755 | % This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of | ||
7756 | % floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here: | ||
7757 | % 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats. | ||
7758 | % | ||
7759 | \def\setref#1#2{% | ||
7760 | \pdfmkdest{#1}% | ||
7761 | \iflinks | ||
7762 | {% | ||
7763 | \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them | ||
7764 | \edef\writexrdef##1##2{% | ||
7765 | \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef | ||
7766 | ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef | ||
7767 | }% | ||
7768 | \toks0 = \expandafter{\lastsection}% | ||
7769 | \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }% | ||
7770 | \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc. | ||
7771 | \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, at \shipout | ||
7772 | }% | ||
7773 | \fi | ||
7774 | } | ||
7775 | |||
7776 | % @xrefautosectiontitle on|off says whether @section(ing) names are used | ||
7777 | % automatically in xrefs, if the third arg is not explicitly specified. | ||
7778 | % This was provided as a "secret" @set xref-automatic-section-title | ||
7779 | % variable, now it's official. | ||
7780 | % | ||
7781 | \parseargdef\xrefautomaticsectiontitle{% | ||
7782 | \def\temp{#1}% | ||
7783 | \ifx\temp\onword | ||
7784 | \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname | ||
7785 | = \empty | ||
7786 | \else\ifx\temp\offword | ||
7787 | \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname | ||
7788 | = \relax | ||
7789 | \else | ||
7790 | \errhelp = \EMsimple | ||
7791 | \errmessage{Unknown @xrefautomaticsectiontitle value `\temp', | ||
7792 | must be on|off}% | ||
7793 | \fi\fi | ||
7794 | } | ||
7795 | |||
7796 | |||
7797 | % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is | ||
7798 | % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed | ||
7799 | % node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed | ||
7800 | % manual. All but the node name can be omitted. | ||
7801 | % | ||
7802 | \def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} | ||
7803 | \def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} | ||
7804 | \def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} | ||
7805 | \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup | ||
7806 | \unsepspaces | ||
7807 | \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}% | ||
7808 | \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}% | ||
7809 | \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}% | ||
7810 | \setbox0=\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}% | ||
7811 | \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt | ||
7812 | % No printed node name was explicitly given. | ||
7813 | \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname \relax | ||
7814 | % Use the node name inside the square brackets. | ||
7815 | \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% | ||
7816 | \else | ||
7817 | % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside | ||
7818 | % the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it. | ||
7819 | \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt | ||
7820 | % It is in another manual, so we don't have it. | ||
7821 | \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% | ||
7822 | \else | ||
7823 | \ifhavexrefs | ||
7824 | % We know the real title if we have the xref values. | ||
7825 | \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}% | ||
7826 | \else | ||
7827 | % Otherwise just copy the Info node name. | ||
7828 | \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% | ||
7829 | \fi% | ||
7830 | \fi | ||
7831 | \fi | ||
7832 | \fi | ||
7833 | % | ||
7834 | % Make link in pdf output. | ||
7835 | \ifpdf | ||
7836 | {\indexnofonts | ||
7837 | \turnoffactive | ||
7838 | % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _ | ||
7839 | % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. | ||
7840 | \getfilename{#4}% | ||
7841 | % | ||
7842 | \edef\pdfxrefdest{#1}% | ||
7843 | \txiescapepdf\pdfxrefdest | ||
7844 | % | ||
7845 | \leavevmode | ||
7846 | \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% | ||
7847 | \ifnum\filenamelength>0 | ||
7848 | goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}% | ||
7849 | \else | ||
7850 | goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}% | ||
7851 | \fi | ||
7852 | }% | ||
7853 | \setcolor{\linkcolor}% | ||
7854 | \fi | ||
7855 | % | ||
7856 | % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2" | ||
7857 | % instead of "[somenode], p.3". We distinguish them by the | ||
7858 | % LABEL-title being set to a magic string. | ||
7859 | {% | ||
7860 | % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to | ||
7861 | % include an _ in the xref name, etc. | ||
7862 | \indexnofonts | ||
7863 | \turnoffactive | ||
7864 | \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle | ||
7865 | \csname XR#1-title\endcsname | ||
7866 | }% | ||
7867 | \iffloat\Xthisreftitle | ||
7868 | % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref, | ||
7869 | % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2". | ||
7870 | \ifdim\wd0 = 0pt | ||
7871 | \refx{#1-snt}{}% | ||
7872 | \else | ||
7873 | \printedrefname | ||
7874 | \fi | ||
7875 | % | ||
7876 | % if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append | ||
7877 | % "in MANUALNAME". | ||
7878 | \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt | ||
7879 | \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% | ||
7880 | \fi | ||
7881 | \else | ||
7882 | % node/anchor (non-float) references. | ||
7883 | % | ||
7884 | % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not | ||
7885 | % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will | ||
7886 | % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals | ||
7887 | % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this | ||
7888 | % is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it | ||
7889 | % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time. | ||
7890 | \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt | ||
7891 | \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% | ||
7892 | \else | ||
7893 | % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the | ||
7894 | % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand | ||
7895 | % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of | ||
7896 | % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the | ||
7897 | % printing, back off for the \refx-pg. | ||
7898 | {\turnoffactive | ||
7899 | % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for | ||
7900 | % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be. | ||
7901 | \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}% | ||
7902 | \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi | ||
7903 | }% | ||
7904 | % output the `[mynode]' via a macro so it can be overridden. | ||
7905 | \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname | ||
7906 | % | ||
7907 | % But we always want a comma and a space: | ||
7908 | ,\space | ||
7909 | % | ||
7910 | % output the `page 3'. | ||
7911 | \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}% | ||
7912 | \fi | ||
7913 | \fi | ||
7914 | \endlink | ||
7915 | \endgroup} | ||
7916 | |||
7917 | % This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref | ||
7918 | % output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily, | ||
7919 | % since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly | ||
7920 | % one that Bob is working on :). | ||
7921 | % | ||
7922 | \def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]} | ||
7923 | |||
7924 | % Things referred to by \setref. | ||
7925 | % | ||
7926 | \def\Ynothing{} | ||
7927 | \def\Yomitfromtoc{} | ||
7928 | \def\Ynumbered{% | ||
7929 | \ifnum\secno=0 | ||
7930 | \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno | ||
7931 | \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 | ||
7932 | \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno | ||
7933 | \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 | ||
7934 | \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno | ||
7935 | \else | ||
7936 | \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno | ||
7937 | \fi\fi\fi | ||
7938 | } | ||
7939 | \def\Yappendix{% | ||
7940 | \ifnum\secno=0 | ||
7941 | \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}% | ||
7942 | \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 | ||
7943 | \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno | ||
7944 | \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 | ||
7945 | \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno | ||
7946 | \else | ||
7947 | \putwordSection@tie | ||
7948 | @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno | ||
7949 | \fi\fi\fi | ||
7950 | } | ||
7951 | |||
7952 | % Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME. | ||
7953 | % If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward. | ||
7954 | % | ||
7955 | \def\refx#1#2{% | ||
7956 | {% | ||
7957 | \indexnofonts | ||
7958 | \otherbackslash | ||
7959 | \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX | ||
7960 | \csname XR#1\endcsname | ||
7961 | }% | ||
7962 | \ifx\thisrefX\relax | ||
7963 | % If not defined, say something at least. | ||
7964 | \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright | ||
7965 | \iflinks | ||
7966 | \ifhavexrefs | ||
7967 | {\toks0 = {#1}% avoid expansion of possibly-complex value | ||
7968 | \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `\the\toks0'.}}% | ||
7969 | \else | ||
7970 | \ifwarnedxrefs\else | ||
7971 | \global\warnedxrefstrue | ||
7972 | \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% | ||
7973 | \fi | ||
7974 | \fi | ||
7975 | \fi | ||
7976 | \else | ||
7977 | % It's defined, so just use it. | ||
7978 | \thisrefX | ||
7979 | \fi | ||
7980 | #2% Output the suffix in any case. | ||
7981 | } | ||
7982 | |||
7983 | % This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Usually it's | ||
7984 | % just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid | ||
7985 | % collisions). But if this is a float type, we have more work to do. | ||
7986 | % | ||
7987 | \def\xrdef#1#2{% | ||
7988 | {% The node name might contain 8-bit characters, which in our current | ||
7989 | % implementation are changed to commands like @'e. Don't let these | ||
7990 | % mess up the control sequence name. | ||
7991 | \indexnofonts | ||
7992 | \turnoffactive | ||
7993 | \xdef\safexrefname{#1}% | ||
7994 | }% | ||
7995 | % | ||
7996 | \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref | ||
7997 | % | ||
7998 | % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float? | ||
7999 | \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname | ||
8000 | % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype. | ||
8001 | \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist | ||
8002 | \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname | ||
8003 | % | ||
8004 | % Is this the first time we've seen this float type? | ||
8005 | \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax | ||
8006 | \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do | ||
8007 | \else | ||
8008 | % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list. | ||
8009 | \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}% | ||
8010 | \fi | ||
8011 | % | ||
8012 | % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE, | ||
8013 | % for later use in \listoffloats. | ||
8014 | \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0 | ||
8015 | {\safexrefname}}% | ||
8016 | \fi | ||
8017 | } | ||
8018 | |||
8019 | % Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists. | ||
8020 | % | ||
8021 | \def\tryauxfile{% | ||
8022 | \openin 1 \jobname.aux | ||
8023 | \ifeof 1 \else | ||
8024 | \readdatafile{aux}% | ||
8025 | \global\havexrefstrue | ||
8026 | \fi | ||
8027 | \closein 1 | ||
8028 | } | ||
8029 | |||
8030 | \def\setupdatafile{% | ||
8031 | \catcode`\^^@=\other | ||
8032 | \catcode`\^^A=\other | ||
8033 | \catcode`\^^B=\other | ||
8034 | \catcode`\^^C=\other | ||
8035 | \catcode`\^^D=\other | ||
8036 | \catcode`\^^E=\other | ||
8037 | \catcode`\^^F=\other | ||
8038 | \catcode`\^^G=\other | ||
8039 | \catcode`\^^H=\other | ||
8040 | \catcode`\^^K=\other | ||
8041 | \catcode`\^^L=\other | ||
8042 | \catcode`\^^N=\other | ||
8043 | \catcode`\^^P=\other | ||
8044 | \catcode`\^^Q=\other | ||
8045 | \catcode`\^^R=\other | ||
8046 | \catcode`\^^S=\other | ||
8047 | \catcode`\^^T=\other | ||
8048 | \catcode`\^^U=\other | ||
8049 | \catcode`\^^V=\other | ||
8050 | \catcode`\^^W=\other | ||
8051 | \catcode`\^^X=\other | ||
8052 | \catcode`\^^Z=\other | ||
8053 | \catcode`\^^[=\other | ||
8054 | \catcode`\^^\=\other | ||
8055 | \catcode`\^^]=\other | ||
8056 | \catcode`\^^^=\other | ||
8057 | \catcode`\^^_=\other | ||
8058 | % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc. | ||
8059 | % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't | ||
8060 | % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore, | ||
8061 | % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^ | ||
8062 | % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat | ||
8063 | % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first | ||
8064 | % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could | ||
8065 | % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't. | ||
8066 | % | ||
8067 | % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat: | ||
8068 | % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter | ||
8069 | % and then to call \auxhat in \setq. | ||
8070 | % | ||
8071 | \catcode`\^=\other | ||
8072 | % | ||
8073 | % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but... | ||
8074 | \catcode`\~=\other | ||
8075 | \catcode`\[=\other | ||
8076 | \catcode`\]=\other | ||
8077 | \catcode`\"=\other | ||
8078 | \catcode`\_=\other | ||
8079 | \catcode`\|=\other | ||
8080 | \catcode`\<=\other | ||
8081 | \catcode`\>=\other | ||
8082 | \catcode`\$=\other | ||
8083 | \catcode`\#=\other | ||
8084 | \catcode`\&=\other | ||
8085 | \catcode`\%=\other | ||
8086 | \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off | ||
8087 | % | ||
8088 | % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \ | ||
8089 | % characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than | ||
8090 | % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \ | ||
8091 | % character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value* | ||
8092 | % of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that | ||
8093 | % should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for | ||
8094 | % now. --karl, 15jan04. | ||
8095 | \catcode`\\=\other | ||
8096 | % | ||
8097 | % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters. | ||
8098 | {% | ||
8099 | \count1=128 | ||
8100 | \def\loop{% | ||
8101 | \catcode\count1=\other | ||
8102 | \advance\count1 by 1 | ||
8103 | \ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi | ||
8104 | }% | ||
8105 | }% | ||
8106 | % | ||
8107 | % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces. | ||
8108 | \catcode`\{=1 | ||
8109 | \catcode`\}=2 | ||
8110 | \catcode`\@=0 | ||
8111 | } | ||
8112 | |||
8113 | \def\readdatafile#1{% | ||
8114 | \begingroup | ||
8115 | \setupdatafile | ||
8116 | \input\jobname.#1 | ||
8117 | \endgroup} | ||
8118 | |||
8119 | |||
8120 | \message{insertions,} | ||
8121 | % including footnotes. | ||
8122 | |||
8123 | \newcount \footnoteno | ||
8124 | |||
8125 | % The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is | ||
8126 | % vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a | ||
8127 | % pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is | ||
8128 | % removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a | ||
8129 | % space to prevent strange expansion errors.) | ||
8130 | \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } | ||
8131 | |||
8132 | % @footnotestyle is meaningful for Info output only. | ||
8133 | \let\footnotestyle=\comment | ||
8134 | |||
8135 | {\catcode `\@=11 | ||
8136 | % | ||
8137 | % Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain. | ||
8138 | \gdef\footnote{% | ||
8139 | \let\indent=\ptexindent | ||
8140 | \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent | ||
8141 | \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne | ||
8142 | \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}% | ||
8143 | % | ||
8144 | % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the | ||
8145 | % extra spacing after we do the footnote number. | ||
8146 | \let\@sf\empty | ||
8147 | \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi | ||
8148 | % | ||
8149 | % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number. | ||
8150 | \unskip | ||
8151 | \thisfootno\@sf | ||
8152 | \dofootnote | ||
8153 | }% | ||
8154 | |||
8155 | % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the | ||
8156 | % footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general. | ||
8157 | % | ||
8158 | % Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses | ||
8159 | % \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when | ||
8160 | % the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96. | ||
8161 | % | ||
8162 | \gdef\dofootnote{% | ||
8163 | \insert\footins\bgroup | ||
8164 | % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the | ||
8165 | % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. | ||
8166 | % So reset some parameters. | ||
8167 | \hsize=\pagewidth | ||
8168 | \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty | ||
8169 | \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes | ||
8170 | \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox | ||
8171 | \floatingpenalty\@MM | ||
8172 | \leftskip\z@skip | ||
8173 | \rightskip\z@skip | ||
8174 | \spaceskip\z@skip | ||
8175 | \xspaceskip\z@skip | ||
8176 | \parindent\defaultparindent | ||
8177 | % | ||
8178 | \smallfonts \rm | ||
8179 | % | ||
8180 | % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears | ||
8181 | % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use | ||
8182 | % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote | ||
8183 | % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style). | ||
8184 | \let\noindent = \relax | ||
8185 | % | ||
8186 | % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the | ||
8187 | % footnote extends for more than one paragraph. | ||
8188 | \everypar = {\hang}% | ||
8189 | \textindent{\thisfootno}% | ||
8190 | % | ||
8191 | % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this | ||
8192 | % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it | ||
8193 | % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. | ||
8194 | \footstrut | ||
8195 | % | ||
8196 | % Invoke rest of plain TeX footnote routine. | ||
8197 | \futurelet\next\fo@t | ||
8198 | } | ||
8199 | }%end \catcode `\@=11 | ||
8200 | |||
8201 | % In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create | ||
8202 | % the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion | ||
8203 | % would be lost. | ||
8204 | % Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote | ||
8205 | % text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished. | ||
8206 | % And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03. | ||
8207 | |||
8208 | % Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro. | ||
8209 | % Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled | ||
8210 | % out prematurely. | ||
8211 | % | ||
8212 | \def\startsavinginserts{% | ||
8213 | \ifx \insert\ptexinsert | ||
8214 | \let\insert\saveinsert | ||
8215 | \else | ||
8216 | \let\checkinserts\relax | ||
8217 | \fi | ||
8218 | } | ||
8219 | |||
8220 | % This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and | ||
8221 | % \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}. | ||
8222 | % | ||
8223 | \def\saveinsert#1{% | ||
8224 | \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}% | ||
8225 | \afterassignment\next | ||
8226 | % swallow the left brace | ||
8227 | \let\temp = | ||
8228 | } | ||
8229 | \def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}} | ||
8230 | \def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1} | ||
8231 | |||
8232 | \def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi} | ||
8233 | |||
8234 | \def\placesaveins#1{% | ||
8235 | \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname | ||
8236 | {\box#1}% | ||
8237 | } | ||
8238 | |||
8239 | % eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other: | ||
8240 | { | ||
8241 | \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-) | ||
8242 | \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{} | ||
8243 | } | ||
8244 | |||
8245 | % initialization: | ||
8246 | \def\newsaveins #1{% | ||
8247 | \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}% | ||
8248 | \next | ||
8249 | } | ||
8250 | \def\newsaveinsX #1{% | ||
8251 | \csname newbox\endcsname #1% | ||
8252 | \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts | ||
8253 | \checksaveins #1}% | ||
8254 | } | ||
8255 | |||
8256 | % initialize: | ||
8257 | \let\checkinserts\empty | ||
8258 | \newsaveins\footins | ||
8259 | \newsaveins\margin | ||
8260 | |||
8261 | |||
8262 | % @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this. | ||
8263 | % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain. | ||
8264 | % | ||
8265 | % Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image | ||
8266 | % time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get | ||
8267 | % undone and the next image would fail. | ||
8268 | \openin 1 = epsf.tex | ||
8269 | \ifeof 1 \else | ||
8270 | % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in | ||
8271 | % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan). | ||
8272 | \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }% | ||
8273 | \input epsf.tex | ||
8274 | \fi | ||
8275 | \closein 1 | ||
8276 | % | ||
8277 | % We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex. | ||
8278 | \newif\ifwarnednoepsf | ||
8279 | \newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to | ||
8280 | work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get | ||
8281 | it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.} | ||
8282 | % | ||
8283 | \def\image#1{% | ||
8284 | \ifx\epsfbox\thisiundefined | ||
8285 | \ifwarnednoepsf \else | ||
8286 | \errhelp = \noepsfhelp | ||
8287 | \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}% | ||
8288 | \global\warnednoepsftrue | ||
8289 | \fi | ||
8290 | \else | ||
8291 | \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish | ||
8292 | \fi | ||
8293 | } | ||
8294 | % | ||
8295 | % Arguments to @image: | ||
8296 | % #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension. | ||
8297 | % #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height. | ||
8298 | % #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text. | ||
8299 | % #5 is (ignored optional) extension. | ||
8300 | % #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing stuff. | ||
8301 | \newif\ifimagevmode | ||
8302 | \def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup | ||
8303 | \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example | ||
8304 | \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names | ||
8305 | % If the image is by itself, center it. | ||
8306 | \ifvmode | ||
8307 | \imagevmodetrue | ||
8308 | \nobreak\medskip | ||
8309 | % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert | ||
8310 | % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space | ||
8311 | % above and below. | ||
8312 | \nobreak\vskip\parskip | ||
8313 | \nobreak | ||
8314 | \fi | ||
8315 | % | ||
8316 | % Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing | ||
8317 | % environment such as @quotation is respected. On the other hand, if | ||
8318 | % it's at the top level, we don't want the normal paragraph indentation. | ||
8319 | \noindent | ||
8320 | % | ||
8321 | % Output the image. | ||
8322 | \ifpdf | ||
8323 | \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}% | ||
8324 | \else | ||
8325 | % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure. | ||
8326 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi | ||
8327 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi | ||
8328 | \epsfbox{#1.eps}% | ||
8329 | \fi | ||
8330 | % | ||
8331 | \ifimagevmode \medskip \fi % space after the standalone image | ||
8332 | \endgroup} | ||
8333 | |||
8334 | |||
8335 | % @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables, | ||
8336 | % etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the | ||
8337 | % float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future. | ||
8338 | % | ||
8339 | \envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish} | ||
8340 | |||
8341 | % There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it. | ||
8342 | \def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,} | ||
8343 | |||
8344 | % #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically | ||
8345 | % "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted, | ||
8346 | % this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to. | ||
8347 | % | ||
8348 | % #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to | ||
8349 | % be referable. | ||
8350 | % | ||
8351 | % #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It | ||
8352 | % will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom). | ||
8353 | % | ||
8354 | % We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each | ||
8355 | % chapter-level command. | ||
8356 | \let\resetallfloatnos=\empty | ||
8357 | % | ||
8358 | \def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% | ||
8359 | \let\thiscaption=\empty | ||
8360 | \let\thisshortcaption=\empty | ||
8361 | % | ||
8362 | % don't lose footnotes inside @float. | ||
8363 | % | ||
8364 | % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an | ||
8365 | % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04 | ||
8366 | % | ||
8367 | \startsavinginserts | ||
8368 | % | ||
8369 | % We can't be used inside a paragraph. | ||
8370 | \par | ||
8371 | % | ||
8372 | \vtop\bgroup | ||
8373 | \def\floattype{#1}% | ||
8374 | \def\floatlabel{#2}% | ||
8375 | \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet. | ||
8376 | % | ||
8377 | \ifx\floattype\empty | ||
8378 | \let\safefloattype=\empty | ||
8379 | \else | ||
8380 | {% | ||
8381 | % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, | ||
8382 | % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. | ||
8383 | \indexnofonts | ||
8384 | \turnoffactive | ||
8385 | \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% | ||
8386 | }% | ||
8387 | \fi | ||
8388 | % | ||
8389 | % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type. | ||
8390 | \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else | ||
8391 | % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1, | ||
8392 | % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.) | ||
8393 | % | ||
8394 | \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname | ||
8395 | \global\advance\floatno by 1 | ||
8396 | % | ||
8397 | {% | ||
8398 | % This magic value for \lastsection is output by \setref as the | ||
8399 | % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float | ||
8400 | % labels (which have a completely different output format) from | ||
8401 | % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the | ||
8402 | % lists of floats. | ||
8403 | % | ||
8404 | \edef\lastsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}% | ||
8405 | \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}% | ||
8406 | }% | ||
8407 | \fi | ||
8408 | % | ||
8409 | % start with \parskip glue, I guess. | ||
8410 | \vskip\parskip | ||
8411 | % | ||
8412 | % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section. | ||
8413 | \restorefirstparagraphindent | ||
8414 | } | ||
8415 | |||
8416 | % we have these possibilities: | ||
8417 | % @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap | ||
8418 | % @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1 | ||
8419 | % @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap | ||
8420 | % @float Foo & no caption: Foo | ||
8421 | % @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap | ||
8422 | % @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1 | ||
8423 | % @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap | ||
8424 | % @float & no caption: | ||
8425 | % | ||
8426 | \def\Efloat{% | ||
8427 | \let\floatident = \empty | ||
8428 | % | ||
8429 | % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first. | ||
8430 | \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi | ||
8431 | % | ||
8432 | % If we have an xref label, the number comes next. | ||
8433 | \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else | ||
8434 | \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first. | ||
8435 | \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}% | ||
8436 | \fi | ||
8437 | % the number. | ||
8438 | \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% | ||
8439 | \fi | ||
8440 | % | ||
8441 | % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in | ||
8442 | % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again. | ||
8443 | \let\captionline = \floatident | ||
8444 | % | ||
8445 | \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else | ||
8446 | \ifx\floatident\empty \else | ||
8447 | \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between | ||
8448 | \fi | ||
8449 | % | ||
8450 | % caption text. | ||
8451 | \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}% | ||
8452 | \fi | ||
8453 | % | ||
8454 | % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before. | ||
8455 | % Eventually this needs to become an \insert. | ||
8456 | \ifx\captionline\empty \else | ||
8457 | \vskip.5\parskip | ||
8458 | \captionline | ||
8459 | % | ||
8460 | % Space below caption. | ||
8461 | \vskip\parskip | ||
8462 | \fi | ||
8463 | % | ||
8464 | % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this | ||
8465 | % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint. | ||
8466 | \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else | ||
8467 | % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as | ||
8468 | % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short | ||
8469 | % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing. | ||
8470 | {% | ||
8471 | \atdummies | ||
8472 | % | ||
8473 | % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M | ||
8474 | % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so | ||
8475 | % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file. | ||
8476 | \scanexp{% | ||
8477 | \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{% | ||
8478 | \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty | ||
8479 | \thiscaption | ||
8480 | \else | ||
8481 | \thisshortcaption | ||
8482 | \fi | ||
8483 | }% | ||
8484 | }% | ||
8485 | \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident | ||
8486 | \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}% | ||
8487 | }% | ||
8488 | \fi | ||
8489 | \egroup % end of \vtop | ||
8490 | % | ||
8491 | % place the captured inserts | ||
8492 | % | ||
8493 | % BEWARE: when the floats start floating, we have to issue warning | ||
8494 | % whenever an insert appears inside a float which could possibly | ||
8495 | % float. --kasal, 26may04 | ||
8496 | % | ||
8497 | \checkinserts | ||
8498 | } | ||
8499 | |||
8500 | % Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either. | ||
8501 | % | ||
8502 | \def\appendtomacro#1#2{% | ||
8503 | \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}% | ||
8504 | } | ||
8505 | |||
8506 | % @caption, @shortcaption | ||
8507 | % | ||
8508 | \def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption} | ||
8509 | \def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption} | ||
8510 | \def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption} | ||
8511 | \def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}} | ||
8512 | |||
8513 | % The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are | ||
8514 | % going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno. | ||
8515 | \def\getfloatno#1{% | ||
8516 | \ifx#1\relax | ||
8517 | % Haven't seen this figure type before. | ||
8518 | \csname newcount\endcsname #1% | ||
8519 | % | ||
8520 | % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap. | ||
8521 | \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos | ||
8522 | \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }% | ||
8523 | \fi | ||
8524 | \let\floatno#1% | ||
8525 | } | ||
8526 | |||
8527 | % \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref | ||
8528 | % to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we | ||
8529 | % first read the @float command. | ||
8530 | % | ||
8531 | \def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% | ||
8532 | |||
8533 | % Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can | ||
8534 | % distinguish floats from other xref types. | ||
8535 | \def\floatmagic{!!float!!} | ||
8536 | |||
8537 | % #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional | ||
8538 | % which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic | ||
8539 | % \lastsection value which we \setref above. | ||
8540 | % | ||
8541 | \def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish} | ||
8542 | % | ||
8543 | % #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the | ||
8544 | % (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2. | ||
8545 | % | ||
8546 | \def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{% | ||
8547 | \def\temp{#1}% | ||
8548 | \def\iffloattype{#2}% | ||
8549 | \ifx\temp\floatmagic | ||
8550 | } | ||
8551 | |||
8552 | % @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents. | ||
8553 | % | ||
8554 | \parseargdef\listoffloats{% | ||
8555 | \def\floattype{#1}% floattype | ||
8556 | {% | ||
8557 | % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, | ||
8558 | % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. | ||
8559 | \indexnofonts | ||
8560 | \turnoffactive | ||
8561 | \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% | ||
8562 | }% | ||
8563 | % | ||
8564 | % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE. | ||
8565 | \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax | ||
8566 | \ifhavexrefs | ||
8567 | % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo. | ||
8568 | \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}% | ||
8569 | \fi | ||
8570 | \else | ||
8571 | \begingroup | ||
8572 | \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc | ||
8573 | \let\do=\listoffloatsdo | ||
8574 | \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname | ||
8575 | \endgroup | ||
8576 | \fi | ||
8577 | } | ||
8578 | |||
8579 | % This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the | ||
8580 | % xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the | ||
8581 | % aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which | ||
8582 | % has the text we're supposed to typeset here. | ||
8583 | % | ||
8584 | % Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since | ||
8585 | % they won't appear in the aux file). | ||
8586 | % | ||
8587 | \def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish} | ||
8588 | \def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{% | ||
8589 | % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just | ||
8590 | % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the | ||
8591 | % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link | ||
8592 | % in pdf output. | ||
8593 | \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}% | ||
8594 | % | ||
8595 | % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index. | ||
8596 | \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}% | ||
8597 | \writeentry | ||
8598 | }} | ||
8599 | |||
8600 | |||
8601 | \message{localization,} | ||
8602 | |||
8603 | % For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very | ||
8604 | % early, just after @documentencoding. Single argument is the language | ||
8605 | % (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation. | ||
8606 | % | ||
8607 | { | ||
8608 | \catcode`\_ = \active | ||
8609 | \globaldefs=1 | ||
8610 | \parseargdef\documentlanguage{\begingroup | ||
8611 | \let_=\normalunderscore % normal _ character for filenames | ||
8612 | \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX. | ||
8613 | % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists. | ||
8614 | \openin 1 txi-#1.tex | ||
8615 | \ifeof 1 | ||
8616 | \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore{#1_\finish}% | ||
8617 | \else | ||
8618 | \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist | ||
8619 | \input txi-#1.tex | ||
8620 | \fi | ||
8621 | \closein 1 | ||
8622 | \endgroup % end raw TeX | ||
8623 | \endgroup} | ||
8624 | % | ||
8625 | % If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist, | ||
8626 | % try txi-de.tex. | ||
8627 | % | ||
8628 | \gdef\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{% | ||
8629 | \openin 1 txi-#1.tex | ||
8630 | \ifeof 1 | ||
8631 | \errhelp = \nolanghelp | ||
8632 | \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}% | ||
8633 | \else | ||
8634 | \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist | ||
8635 | \input txi-#1.tex | ||
8636 | \fi | ||
8637 | \closein 1 | ||
8638 | } | ||
8639 | }% end of special _ catcode | ||
8640 | % | ||
8641 | \newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or | ||
8642 | is empty. Maybe you need to install it? Putting it in the current | ||
8643 | directory should work if nowhere else does.} | ||
8644 | |||
8645 | % This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the | ||
8646 | % \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and | ||
8647 | % third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin. | ||
8648 | % | ||
8649 | % The language names to pass are determined when the format is built. | ||
8650 | % See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g., | ||
8651 | % /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log. | ||
8652 | % | ||
8653 | % With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all | ||
8654 | % available languages. This means we can support hyphenation in | ||
8655 | % Texinfo, at least to some extent. (This still doesn't solve the | ||
8656 | % accented characters problem.) | ||
8657 | % | ||
8658 | \catcode`@=11 | ||
8659 | \def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{% | ||
8660 | % do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX. | ||
8661 | \expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax | ||
8662 | \message{no patterns for #1}% | ||
8663 | \else | ||
8664 | \global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname | ||
8665 | \fi | ||
8666 | % but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless. | ||
8667 | \global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax | ||
8668 | \global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax | ||
8669 | } | ||
8670 | |||
8671 | % Helpers for encodings. | ||
8672 | % Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number. | ||
8673 | % | ||
8674 | \def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{% | ||
8675 | \count255=128 | ||
8676 | \loop\ifnum\count255<256 | ||
8677 | \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax | ||
8678 | \advance\count255 by 1 | ||
8679 | \repeat | ||
8680 | } | ||
8681 | |||
8682 | \def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{% | ||
8683 | \count255=128 | ||
8684 | \loop\ifnum\count255<256 | ||
8685 | \catcode\count255=#1\relax | ||
8686 | \advance\count255 by 1 | ||
8687 | \repeat | ||
8688 | } | ||
8689 | |||
8690 | % @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters | ||
8691 | % according to the specified encoding. | ||
8692 | % | ||
8693 | \parseargdef\documentencoding{% | ||
8694 | % Encoding being declared for the document. | ||
8695 | \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}% | ||
8696 | % | ||
8697 | % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able | ||
8698 | % to compare them with \ifx. | ||
8699 | \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}% | ||
8700 | \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}% | ||
8701 | \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}% | ||
8702 | \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}% | ||
8703 | \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}% | ||
8704 | % | ||
8705 | \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii | ||
8706 | \asciichardefs | ||
8707 | % | ||
8708 | \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo | ||
8709 | \setnonasciicharscatcode\active | ||
8710 | \lattwochardefs | ||
8711 | % | ||
8712 | \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone | ||
8713 | \setnonasciicharscatcode\active | ||
8714 | \latonechardefs | ||
8715 | % | ||
8716 | \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine | ||
8717 | \setnonasciicharscatcode\active | ||
8718 | \latninechardefs | ||
8719 | % | ||
8720 | \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight | ||
8721 | \setnonasciicharscatcode\active | ||
8722 | \utfeightchardefs | ||
8723 | % | ||
8724 | \else | ||
8725 | \message{Unknown document encoding #1, ignoring.}% | ||
8726 | % | ||
8727 | \fi % utfeight | ||
8728 | \fi % latnine | ||
8729 | \fi % latone | ||
8730 | \fi % lattwo | ||
8731 | \fi % ascii | ||
8732 | } | ||
8733 | |||
8734 | % A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available | ||
8735 | % the default font encoding (OT1). | ||
8736 | % | ||
8737 | \def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing in OT1 encoding: #1.}} | ||
8738 | |||
8739 | % Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference. | ||
8740 | \def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi} | ||
8741 | |||
8742 | % First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be | ||
8743 | % correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of | ||
8744 | % macros containing the character definitions. | ||
8745 | \setnonasciicharscatcode\active | ||
8746 | % | ||
8747 | % Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions. | ||
8748 | \def\latonechardefs{% | ||
8749 | \gdef^^a0{\tie} | ||
8750 | \gdef^^a1{\exclamdown} | ||
8751 | \gdef^^a2{\missingcharmsg{CENT SIGN}} | ||
8752 | \gdef^^a3{{\pounds}} | ||
8753 | \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}} | ||
8754 | \gdef^^a5{\missingcharmsg{YEN SIGN}} | ||
8755 | \gdef^^a6{\missingcharmsg{BROKEN BAR}} | ||
8756 | \gdef^^a7{\S} | ||
8757 | \gdef^^a8{\"{}} | ||
8758 | \gdef^^a9{\copyright} | ||
8759 | \gdef^^aa{\ordf} | ||
8760 | \gdef^^ab{\guillemetleft} | ||
8761 | \gdef^^ac{$\lnot$} | ||
8762 | \gdef^^ad{\-} | ||
8763 | \gdef^^ae{\registeredsymbol} | ||
8764 | \gdef^^af{\={}} | ||
8765 | % | ||
8766 | \gdef^^b0{\textdegree} | ||
8767 | \gdef^^b1{$\pm$} | ||
8768 | \gdef^^b2{$^2$} | ||
8769 | \gdef^^b3{$^3$} | ||
8770 | \gdef^^b4{\'{}} | ||
8771 | \gdef^^b5{$\mu$} | ||
8772 | \gdef^^b6{\P} | ||
8773 | % | ||
8774 | \gdef^^b7{$^.$} | ||
8775 | \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ } | ||
8776 | \gdef^^b9{$^1$} | ||
8777 | \gdef^^ba{\ordm} | ||
8778 | % | ||
8779 | \gdef^^bb{\guillemetright} | ||
8780 | \gdef^^bc{$1\over4$} | ||
8781 | \gdef^^bd{$1\over2$} | ||
8782 | \gdef^^be{$3\over4$} | ||
8783 | \gdef^^bf{\questiondown} | ||
8784 | % | ||
8785 | \gdef^^c0{\`A} | ||
8786 | \gdef^^c1{\'A} | ||
8787 | \gdef^^c2{\^A} | ||
8788 | \gdef^^c3{\~A} | ||
8789 | \gdef^^c4{\"A} | ||
8790 | \gdef^^c5{\ringaccent A} | ||
8791 | \gdef^^c6{\AE} | ||
8792 | \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C} | ||
8793 | \gdef^^c8{\`E} | ||
8794 | \gdef^^c9{\'E} | ||
8795 | \gdef^^ca{\^E} | ||
8796 | \gdef^^cb{\"E} | ||
8797 | \gdef^^cc{\`I} | ||
8798 | \gdef^^cd{\'I} | ||
8799 | \gdef^^ce{\^I} | ||
8800 | \gdef^^cf{\"I} | ||
8801 | % | ||
8802 | \gdef^^d0{\DH} | ||
8803 | \gdef^^d1{\~N} | ||
8804 | \gdef^^d2{\`O} | ||
8805 | \gdef^^d3{\'O} | ||
8806 | \gdef^^d4{\^O} | ||
8807 | \gdef^^d5{\~O} | ||
8808 | \gdef^^d6{\"O} | ||
8809 | \gdef^^d7{$\times$} | ||
8810 | \gdef^^d8{\O} | ||
8811 | \gdef^^d9{\`U} | ||
8812 | \gdef^^da{\'U} | ||
8813 | \gdef^^db{\^U} | ||
8814 | \gdef^^dc{\"U} | ||
8815 | \gdef^^dd{\'Y} | ||
8816 | \gdef^^de{\TH} | ||
8817 | \gdef^^df{\ss} | ||
8818 | % | ||
8819 | \gdef^^e0{\`a} | ||
8820 | \gdef^^e1{\'a} | ||
8821 | \gdef^^e2{\^a} | ||
8822 | \gdef^^e3{\~a} | ||
8823 | \gdef^^e4{\"a} | ||
8824 | \gdef^^e5{\ringaccent a} | ||
8825 | \gdef^^e6{\ae} | ||
8826 | \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c} | ||
8827 | \gdef^^e8{\`e} | ||
8828 | \gdef^^e9{\'e} | ||
8829 | \gdef^^ea{\^e} | ||
8830 | \gdef^^eb{\"e} | ||
8831 | \gdef^^ec{\`{\dotless i}} | ||
8832 | \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless i}} | ||
8833 | \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless i}} | ||
8834 | \gdef^^ef{\"{\dotless i}} | ||
8835 | % | ||
8836 | \gdef^^f0{\dh} | ||
8837 | \gdef^^f1{\~n} | ||
8838 | \gdef^^f2{\`o} | ||
8839 | \gdef^^f3{\'o} | ||
8840 | \gdef^^f4{\^o} | ||
8841 | \gdef^^f5{\~o} | ||
8842 | \gdef^^f6{\"o} | ||
8843 | \gdef^^f7{$\div$} | ||
8844 | \gdef^^f8{\o} | ||
8845 | \gdef^^f9{\`u} | ||
8846 | \gdef^^fa{\'u} | ||
8847 | \gdef^^fb{\^u} | ||
8848 | \gdef^^fc{\"u} | ||
8849 | \gdef^^fd{\'y} | ||
8850 | \gdef^^fe{\th} | ||
8851 | \gdef^^ff{\"y} | ||
8852 | } | ||
8853 | |||
8854 | % Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions. | ||
8855 | \def\latninechardefs{% | ||
8856 | % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1. | ||
8857 | \latonechardefs | ||
8858 | % | ||
8859 | \gdef^^a4{\euro} | ||
8860 | \gdef^^a6{\v S} | ||
8861 | \gdef^^a8{\v s} | ||
8862 | \gdef^^b4{\v Z} | ||
8863 | \gdef^^b8{\v z} | ||
8864 | \gdef^^bc{\OE} | ||
8865 | \gdef^^bd{\oe} | ||
8866 | \gdef^^be{\"Y} | ||
8867 | } | ||
8868 | |||
8869 | % Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions. | ||
8870 | \def\lattwochardefs{% | ||
8871 | \gdef^^a0{\tie} | ||
8872 | \gdef^^a1{\ogonek{A}} | ||
8873 | \gdef^^a2{\u{}} | ||
8874 | \gdef^^a3{\L} | ||
8875 | \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}} | ||
8876 | \gdef^^a5{\v L} | ||
8877 | \gdef^^a6{\'S} | ||
8878 | \gdef^^a7{\S} | ||
8879 | \gdef^^a8{\"{}} | ||
8880 | \gdef^^a9{\v S} | ||
8881 | \gdef^^aa{\cedilla S} | ||
8882 | \gdef^^ab{\v T} | ||
8883 | \gdef^^ac{\'Z} | ||
8884 | \gdef^^ad{\-} | ||
8885 | \gdef^^ae{\v Z} | ||
8886 | \gdef^^af{\dotaccent Z} | ||
8887 | % | ||
8888 | \gdef^^b0{\textdegree} | ||
8889 | \gdef^^b1{\ogonek{a}} | ||
8890 | \gdef^^b2{\ogonek{ }} | ||
8891 | \gdef^^b3{\l} | ||
8892 | \gdef^^b4{\'{}} | ||
8893 | \gdef^^b5{\v l} | ||
8894 | \gdef^^b6{\'s} | ||
8895 | \gdef^^b7{\v{}} | ||
8896 | \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ } | ||
8897 | \gdef^^b9{\v s} | ||
8898 | \gdef^^ba{\cedilla s} | ||
8899 | \gdef^^bb{\v t} | ||
8900 | \gdef^^bc{\'z} | ||
8901 | \gdef^^bd{\H{}} | ||
8902 | \gdef^^be{\v z} | ||
8903 | \gdef^^bf{\dotaccent z} | ||
8904 | % | ||
8905 | \gdef^^c0{\'R} | ||
8906 | \gdef^^c1{\'A} | ||
8907 | \gdef^^c2{\^A} | ||
8908 | \gdef^^c3{\u A} | ||
8909 | \gdef^^c4{\"A} | ||
8910 | \gdef^^c5{\'L} | ||
8911 | \gdef^^c6{\'C} | ||
8912 | \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C} | ||
8913 | \gdef^^c8{\v C} | ||
8914 | \gdef^^c9{\'E} | ||
8915 | \gdef^^ca{\ogonek{E}} | ||
8916 | \gdef^^cb{\"E} | ||
8917 | \gdef^^cc{\v E} | ||
8918 | \gdef^^cd{\'I} | ||
8919 | \gdef^^ce{\^I} | ||
8920 | \gdef^^cf{\v D} | ||
8921 | % | ||
8922 | \gdef^^d0{\DH} | ||
8923 | \gdef^^d1{\'N} | ||
8924 | \gdef^^d2{\v N} | ||
8925 | \gdef^^d3{\'O} | ||
8926 | \gdef^^d4{\^O} | ||
8927 | \gdef^^d5{\H O} | ||
8928 | \gdef^^d6{\"O} | ||
8929 | \gdef^^d7{$\times$} | ||
8930 | \gdef^^d8{\v R} | ||
8931 | \gdef^^d9{\ringaccent U} | ||
8932 | \gdef^^da{\'U} | ||
8933 | \gdef^^db{\H U} | ||
8934 | \gdef^^dc{\"U} | ||
8935 | \gdef^^dd{\'Y} | ||
8936 | \gdef^^de{\cedilla T} | ||
8937 | \gdef^^df{\ss} | ||
8938 | % | ||
8939 | \gdef^^e0{\'r} | ||
8940 | \gdef^^e1{\'a} | ||
8941 | \gdef^^e2{\^a} | ||
8942 | \gdef^^e3{\u a} | ||
8943 | \gdef^^e4{\"a} | ||
8944 | \gdef^^e5{\'l} | ||
8945 | \gdef^^e6{\'c} | ||
8946 | \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c} | ||
8947 | \gdef^^e8{\v c} | ||
8948 | \gdef^^e9{\'e} | ||
8949 | \gdef^^ea{\ogonek{e}} | ||
8950 | \gdef^^eb{\"e} | ||
8951 | \gdef^^ec{\v e} | ||
8952 | \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless{i}}} | ||
8953 | \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless{i}}} | ||
8954 | \gdef^^ef{\v d} | ||
8955 | % | ||
8956 | \gdef^^f0{\dh} | ||
8957 | \gdef^^f1{\'n} | ||
8958 | \gdef^^f2{\v n} | ||
8959 | \gdef^^f3{\'o} | ||
8960 | \gdef^^f4{\^o} | ||
8961 | \gdef^^f5{\H o} | ||
8962 | \gdef^^f6{\"o} | ||
8963 | \gdef^^f7{$\div$} | ||
8964 | \gdef^^f8{\v r} | ||
8965 | \gdef^^f9{\ringaccent u} | ||
8966 | \gdef^^fa{\'u} | ||
8967 | \gdef^^fb{\H u} | ||
8968 | \gdef^^fc{\"u} | ||
8969 | \gdef^^fd{\'y} | ||
8970 | \gdef^^fe{\cedilla t} | ||
8971 | \gdef^^ff{\dotaccent{}} | ||
8972 | } | ||
8973 | |||
8974 | % UTF-8 character definitions. | ||
8975 | % | ||
8976 | % This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some | ||
8977 | % changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by | ||
8978 | % permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team. | ||
8979 | % | ||
8980 | \newcount\countUTFx | ||
8981 | \newcount\countUTFy | ||
8982 | \newcount\countUTFz | ||
8983 | |||
8984 | \gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter | ||
8985 | \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname} | ||
8986 | % | ||
8987 | \gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter | ||
8988 | \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname} | ||
8989 | % | ||
8990 | \gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter | ||
8991 | \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname} | ||
8992 | |||
8993 | \gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{% | ||
8994 | \ifx #1\relax | ||
8995 | \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}% | ||
8996 | \else | ||
8997 | \expandafter #1% | ||
8998 | \fi | ||
8999 | } | ||
9000 | |||
9001 | \begingroup | ||
9002 | \catcode`\~13 | ||
9003 | \catcode`\"12 | ||
9004 | |||
9005 | \def\UTFviiiLoop{% | ||
9006 | \global\catcode\countUTFx\active | ||
9007 | \uccode`\~\countUTFx | ||
9008 | \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}% | ||
9009 | \advance\countUTFx by 1 | ||
9010 | \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy | ||
9011 | \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop | ||
9012 | \fi} | ||
9013 | |||
9014 | \countUTFx = "C2 | ||
9015 | \countUTFy = "E0 | ||
9016 | \def\UTFviiiTmp{% | ||
9017 | \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiTwoOctets\string~}} | ||
9018 | \UTFviiiLoop | ||
9019 | |||
9020 | \countUTFx = "E0 | ||
9021 | \countUTFy = "F0 | ||
9022 | \def\UTFviiiTmp{% | ||
9023 | \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiThreeOctets\string~}} | ||
9024 | \UTFviiiLoop | ||
9025 | |||
9026 | \countUTFx = "F0 | ||
9027 | \countUTFy = "F4 | ||
9028 | \def\UTFviiiTmp{% | ||
9029 | \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiFourOctets\string~}} | ||
9030 | \UTFviiiLoop | ||
9031 | \endgroup | ||
9032 | |||
9033 | \begingroup | ||
9034 | \catcode`\"=12 | ||
9035 | \catcode`\<=12 | ||
9036 | \catcode`\.=12 | ||
9037 | \catcode`\,=12 | ||
9038 | \catcode`\;=12 | ||
9039 | \catcode`\!=12 | ||
9040 | \catcode`\~=13 | ||
9041 | |||
9042 | \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacter#1#2{% | ||
9043 | \countUTFz = "#1\relax | ||
9044 | %\wlog{\space\space defining Unicode char U+#1 (decimal \the\countUTFz)}% | ||
9045 | \begingroup | ||
9046 | \parseXMLCharref | ||
9047 | \def\UTFviiiTwoOctets##1##2{% | ||
9048 | \csname u8:##1\string ##2\endcsname}% | ||
9049 | \def\UTFviiiThreeOctets##1##2##3{% | ||
9050 | \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\endcsname}% | ||
9051 | \def\UTFviiiFourOctets##1##2##3##4{% | ||
9052 | \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\string ##4\endcsname}% | ||
9053 | \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter | ||
9054 | \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter | ||
9055 | \gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2}% | ||
9056 | \endgroup} | ||
9057 | |||
9058 | \gdef\parseXMLCharref{% | ||
9059 | \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax | ||
9060 | \errhelp = \EMsimple | ||
9061 | \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}% | ||
9062 | \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax | ||
9063 | \parseUTFviiiA,% | ||
9064 | \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctets.,% | ||
9065 | \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax | ||
9066 | \parseUTFviiiA;% | ||
9067 | \parseUTFviiiA,% | ||
9068 | \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctets.{,;}% | ||
9069 | \else | ||
9070 | \parseUTFviiiA;% | ||
9071 | \parseUTFviiiA,% | ||
9072 | \parseUTFviiiA!% | ||
9073 | \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctets.{!,;}% | ||
9074 | \fi\fi\fi | ||
9075 | } | ||
9076 | |||
9077 | \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{% | ||
9078 | \countUTFx = \countUTFz | ||
9079 | \divide\countUTFz by 64 | ||
9080 | \countUTFy = \countUTFz | ||
9081 | \multiply\countUTFz by 64 | ||
9082 | \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz | ||
9083 | \advance\countUTFx by 128 | ||
9084 | \uccode `#1\countUTFx | ||
9085 | \countUTFz = \countUTFy} | ||
9086 | |||
9087 | \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{% | ||
9088 | \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax | ||
9089 | \uccode `#3\countUTFz | ||
9090 | \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}} | ||
9091 | \endgroup | ||
9092 | |||
9093 | \def\utfeightchardefs{% | ||
9094 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie} | ||
9095 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown} | ||
9096 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds} | ||
9097 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }} | ||
9098 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright} | ||
9099 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf} | ||
9100 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft} | ||
9101 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-} | ||
9102 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol} | ||
9103 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }} | ||
9104 | |||
9105 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }} | ||
9106 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }} | ||
9107 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }} | ||
9108 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm} | ||
9109 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright} | ||
9110 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown} | ||
9111 | |||
9112 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A} | ||
9113 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A} | ||
9114 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A} | ||
9115 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A} | ||
9116 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A} | ||
9117 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA} | ||
9118 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE} | ||
9119 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}} | ||
9120 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E} | ||
9121 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E} | ||
9122 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E} | ||
9123 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E} | ||
9124 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I} | ||
9125 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I} | ||
9126 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I} | ||
9127 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I} | ||
9128 | |||
9129 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D0}{\DH} | ||
9130 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N} | ||
9131 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O} | ||
9132 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O} | ||
9133 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O} | ||
9134 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O} | ||
9135 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O} | ||
9136 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O} | ||
9137 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U} | ||
9138 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U} | ||
9139 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U} | ||
9140 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U} | ||
9141 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y} | ||
9142 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DE}{\TH} | ||
9143 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss} | ||
9144 | |||
9145 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a} | ||
9146 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a} | ||
9147 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a} | ||
9148 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a} | ||
9149 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a} | ||
9150 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa} | ||
9151 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae} | ||
9152 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}} | ||
9153 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e} | ||
9154 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e} | ||
9155 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e} | ||
9156 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e} | ||
9157 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}} | ||
9158 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}} | ||
9159 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}} | ||
9160 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}} | ||
9161 | |||
9162 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F0}{\dh} | ||
9163 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n} | ||
9164 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o} | ||
9165 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o} | ||
9166 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o} | ||
9167 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o} | ||
9168 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o} | ||
9169 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o} | ||
9170 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u} | ||
9171 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u} | ||
9172 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u} | ||
9173 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u} | ||
9174 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y} | ||
9175 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FE}{\th} | ||
9176 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y} | ||
9177 | |||
9178 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A} | ||
9179 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a} | ||
9180 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}} | ||
9181 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}} | ||
9182 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}} | ||
9183 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}} | ||
9184 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C} | ||
9185 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c} | ||
9186 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C} | ||
9187 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c} | ||
9188 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}} | ||
9189 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}} | ||
9190 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}} | ||
9191 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}} | ||
9192 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}} | ||
9193 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}} | ||
9194 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}} | ||
9195 | |||
9196 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E} | ||
9197 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e} | ||
9198 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}} | ||
9199 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}} | ||
9200 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}} | ||
9201 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}} | ||
9202 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}} | ||
9203 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}} | ||
9204 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G} | ||
9205 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g} | ||
9206 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}} | ||
9207 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}} | ||
9208 | |||
9209 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}} | ||
9210 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}} | ||
9211 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H} | ||
9212 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h} | ||
9213 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I} | ||
9214 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}} | ||
9215 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I} | ||
9216 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}} | ||
9217 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}} | ||
9218 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}} | ||
9219 | |||
9220 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}} | ||
9221 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}} | ||
9222 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ} | ||
9223 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij} | ||
9224 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J} | ||
9225 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}} | ||
9226 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L} | ||
9227 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l} | ||
9228 | |||
9229 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L} | ||
9230 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l} | ||
9231 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N} | ||
9232 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n} | ||
9233 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}} | ||
9234 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}} | ||
9235 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O} | ||
9236 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o} | ||
9237 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}} | ||
9238 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}} | ||
9239 | |||
9240 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}} | ||
9241 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}} | ||
9242 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE} | ||
9243 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe} | ||
9244 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R} | ||
9245 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r} | ||
9246 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}} | ||
9247 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}} | ||
9248 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S} | ||
9249 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s} | ||
9250 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S} | ||
9251 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s} | ||
9252 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}} | ||
9253 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}} | ||
9254 | |||
9255 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}} | ||
9256 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}} | ||
9257 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{t}} | ||
9258 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{T}} | ||
9259 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}} | ||
9260 | |||
9261 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U} | ||
9262 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u} | ||
9263 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U} | ||
9264 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u} | ||
9265 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}} | ||
9266 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}} | ||
9267 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}} | ||
9268 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}} | ||
9269 | |||
9270 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}} | ||
9271 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}} | ||
9272 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W} | ||
9273 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w} | ||
9274 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y} | ||
9275 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y} | ||
9276 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y} | ||
9277 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z} | ||
9278 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z} | ||
9279 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}} | ||
9280 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}} | ||
9281 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}} | ||
9282 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}} | ||
9283 | |||
9284 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}} | ||
9285 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}} | ||
9286 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}} | ||
9287 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ} | ||
9288 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj} | ||
9289 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj} | ||
9290 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ} | ||
9291 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj} | ||
9292 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj} | ||
9293 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}} | ||
9294 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}} | ||
9295 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}} | ||
9296 | |||
9297 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}} | ||
9298 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}} | ||
9299 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}} | ||
9300 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}} | ||
9301 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}} | ||
9302 | |||
9303 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}} | ||
9304 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}} | ||
9305 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}} | ||
9306 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}} | ||
9307 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}} | ||
9308 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}} | ||
9309 | |||
9310 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}} | ||
9311 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ} | ||
9312 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz} | ||
9313 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz} | ||
9314 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G} | ||
9315 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g} | ||
9316 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N} | ||
9317 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n} | ||
9318 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}} | ||
9319 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}} | ||
9320 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}} | ||
9321 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}} | ||
9322 | |||
9323 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}} | ||
9324 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}} | ||
9325 | |||
9326 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}} | ||
9327 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}} | ||
9328 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}} | ||
9329 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}} | ||
9330 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}} | ||
9331 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}} | ||
9332 | |||
9333 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y} | ||
9334 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y} | ||
9335 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}} | ||
9336 | |||
9337 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }} | ||
9338 | |||
9339 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}} | ||
9340 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}} | ||
9341 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}} | ||
9342 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}} | ||
9343 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}} | ||
9344 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}} | ||
9345 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}} | ||
9346 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}} | ||
9347 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}} | ||
9348 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}} | ||
9349 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}} | ||
9350 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}} | ||
9351 | |||
9352 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}} | ||
9353 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}} | ||
9354 | |||
9355 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G} | ||
9356 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g} | ||
9357 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}} | ||
9358 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}} | ||
9359 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}} | ||
9360 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}} | ||
9361 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H} | ||
9362 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h} | ||
9363 | |||
9364 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K} | ||
9365 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k} | ||
9366 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}} | ||
9367 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}} | ||
9368 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}} | ||
9369 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}} | ||
9370 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}} | ||
9371 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}} | ||
9372 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}} | ||
9373 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}} | ||
9374 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M} | ||
9375 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m} | ||
9376 | |||
9377 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}} | ||
9378 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}} | ||
9379 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}} | ||
9380 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}} | ||
9381 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}} | ||
9382 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}} | ||
9383 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}} | ||
9384 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}} | ||
9385 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}} | ||
9386 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}} | ||
9387 | |||
9388 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P} | ||
9389 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p} | ||
9390 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}} | ||
9391 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}} | ||
9392 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}} | ||
9393 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}} | ||
9394 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}} | ||
9395 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}} | ||
9396 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}} | ||
9397 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}} | ||
9398 | |||
9399 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}} | ||
9400 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}} | ||
9401 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}} | ||
9402 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}} | ||
9403 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}} | ||
9404 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}} | ||
9405 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}} | ||
9406 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}} | ||
9407 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}} | ||
9408 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}} | ||
9409 | |||
9410 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V} | ||
9411 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v} | ||
9412 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}} | ||
9413 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}} | ||
9414 | |||
9415 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W} | ||
9416 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w} | ||
9417 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W} | ||
9418 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w} | ||
9419 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W} | ||
9420 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w} | ||
9421 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}} | ||
9422 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}} | ||
9423 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}} | ||
9424 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}} | ||
9425 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}} | ||
9426 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}} | ||
9427 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X} | ||
9428 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x} | ||
9429 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}} | ||
9430 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}} | ||
9431 | |||
9432 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z} | ||
9433 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z} | ||
9434 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}} | ||
9435 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}} | ||
9436 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}} | ||
9437 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}} | ||
9438 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}} | ||
9439 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t} | ||
9440 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}} | ||
9441 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}} | ||
9442 | |||
9443 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}} | ||
9444 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}} | ||
9445 | |||
9446 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}} | ||
9447 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}} | ||
9448 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E} | ||
9449 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e} | ||
9450 | |||
9451 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}} | ||
9452 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}} | ||
9453 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}} | ||
9454 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}} | ||
9455 | |||
9456 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}} | ||
9457 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}} | ||
9458 | |||
9459 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y} | ||
9460 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y} | ||
9461 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}} | ||
9462 | |||
9463 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y} | ||
9464 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y} | ||
9465 | |||
9466 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--} | ||
9467 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---} | ||
9468 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft} | ||
9469 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright} | ||
9470 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase} | ||
9471 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft} | ||
9472 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright} | ||
9473 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase} | ||
9474 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet} | ||
9475 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots} | ||
9476 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft} | ||
9477 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright} | ||
9478 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro} | ||
9479 | |||
9480 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion} | ||
9481 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result} | ||
9482 | |||
9483 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus} | ||
9484 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\point} | ||
9485 | \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv} | ||
9486 | }% end of \utfeightchardefs | ||
9487 | |||
9488 | |||
9489 | % US-ASCII character definitions. | ||
9490 | \def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done | ||
9491 | \relax | ||
9492 | } | ||
9493 | |||
9494 | % Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with | ||
9495 | % existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a | ||
9496 | % document encoding. | ||
9497 | % | ||
9498 | \setnonasciicharscatcode \other | ||
9499 | |||
9500 | |||
9501 | \message{formatting,} | ||
9502 | |||
9503 | \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt | ||
9504 | |||
9505 | \chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt | ||
9506 | \secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt | ||
9507 | \subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt | ||
9508 | |||
9509 | % Prevent underfull vbox error messages. | ||
9510 | \vbadness = 10000 | ||
9511 | |||
9512 | % Don't be very finicky about underfull hboxes, either. | ||
9513 | \hbadness = 6666 | ||
9514 | |||
9515 | % Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans. | ||
9516 | \widowpenalty=10000 | ||
9517 | \clubpenalty=10000 | ||
9518 | |||
9519 | % Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're | ||
9520 | % using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of | ||
9521 | % stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on | ||
9522 | % \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set. | ||
9523 | % | ||
9524 | \def\setemergencystretch{% | ||
9525 | \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined | ||
9526 | % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. | ||
9527 | \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% | ||
9528 | \else | ||
9529 | \emergencystretch = .15\hsize | ||
9530 | \fi | ||
9531 | } | ||
9532 | |||
9533 | % Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; | ||
9534 | % 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; | ||
9535 | % 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width. | ||
9536 | % | ||
9537 | % We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define | ||
9538 | % \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip. | ||
9539 | % | ||
9540 | \def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{% | ||
9541 | \voffset = #3\relax | ||
9542 | \topskip = #6\relax | ||
9543 | \splittopskip = \topskip | ||
9544 | % | ||
9545 | \vsize = #1\relax | ||
9546 | \advance\vsize by \topskip | ||
9547 | \outervsize = \vsize | ||
9548 | \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin | ||
9549 | \pageheight = \vsize | ||
9550 | % | ||
9551 | \hsize = #2\relax | ||
9552 | \outerhsize = \hsize | ||
9553 | \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in | ||
9554 | \pagewidth = \hsize | ||
9555 | % | ||
9556 | \normaloffset = #4\relax | ||
9557 | \bindingoffset = #5\relax | ||
9558 | % | ||
9559 | \ifpdf | ||
9560 | \pdfpageheight #7\relax | ||
9561 | \pdfpagewidth #8\relax | ||
9562 | % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of | ||
9563 | % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with. | ||
9564 | \pdfhorigin = 1 true in | ||
9565 | \pdfvorigin = 1 true in | ||
9566 | \fi | ||
9567 | % | ||
9568 | \setleading{\textleading} | ||
9569 | % | ||
9570 | \parindent = \defaultparindent | ||
9571 | \setemergencystretch | ||
9572 | } | ||
9573 | |||
9574 | % @letterpaper (the default). | ||
9575 | \def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 | ||
9576 | \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt | ||
9577 | \textleading = 13.2pt | ||
9578 | % | ||
9579 | % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even. | ||
9580 | \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines | ||
9581 | {\voffset}{.25in}% | ||
9582 | {\bindingoffset}{36pt}% | ||
9583 | {11in}{8.5in}% | ||
9584 | }} | ||
9585 | |||
9586 | % Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size. | ||
9587 | \def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1 | ||
9588 | \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt | ||
9589 | \textleading = 12pt | ||
9590 | % | ||
9591 | \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}% | ||
9592 | {-.2in}{0in}% | ||
9593 | {\bindingoffset}{16pt}% | ||
9594 | {9.25in}{7in}% | ||
9595 | % | ||
9596 | \lispnarrowing = 0.3in | ||
9597 | \tolerance = 700 | ||
9598 | \hfuzz = 1pt | ||
9599 | \contentsrightmargin = 0pt | ||
9600 | \defbodyindent = .5cm | ||
9601 | }} | ||
9602 | |||
9603 | % Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size. | ||
9604 | % (Just testing, parameters still in flux.) | ||
9605 | \def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1 | ||
9606 | \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt | ||
9607 | \textleading = 12pt | ||
9608 | % | ||
9609 | \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}% | ||
9610 | {-.2in}{-.4in}% | ||
9611 | {0pt}{14pt}% | ||
9612 | {9in}{6in}% | ||
9613 | % | ||
9614 | \lispnarrowing = 0.25in | ||
9615 | \tolerance = 700 | ||
9616 | \hfuzz = 1pt | ||
9617 | \contentsrightmargin = 0pt | ||
9618 | \defbodyindent = .4cm | ||
9619 | }} | ||
9620 | |||
9621 | % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. | ||
9622 | \def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 | ||
9623 | \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt | ||
9624 | \textleading = 13.2pt | ||
9625 | % | ||
9626 | % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050 | ||
9627 | % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm. | ||
9628 | % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust | ||
9629 | % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then | ||
9630 | % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in | ||
9631 | % your texinfo source file like this: | ||
9632 | % @tex | ||
9633 | % \global\normaloffset = -6mm | ||
9634 | % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm | ||
9635 | % @end tex | ||
9636 | \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines | ||
9637 | {\voffset}{\hoffset}% | ||
9638 | {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% | ||
9639 | {297mm}{210mm}% | ||
9640 | % | ||
9641 | \tolerance = 700 | ||
9642 | \hfuzz = 1pt | ||
9643 | \contentsrightmargin = 0pt | ||
9644 | \defbodyindent = 5mm | ||
9645 | }} | ||
9646 | |||
9647 | % Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper. | ||
9648 | % From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000. | ||
9649 | % He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small. | ||
9650 | \def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1 | ||
9651 | \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt | ||
9652 | \textleading = 12.5pt | ||
9653 | % | ||
9654 | \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}% | ||
9655 | {\voffset}{\hoffset}% | ||
9656 | {\bindingoffset}{8pt}% | ||
9657 | {210mm}{148mm}% | ||
9658 | % | ||
9659 | \lispnarrowing = 0.2in | ||
9660 | \tolerance = 800 | ||
9661 | \hfuzz = 1.2pt | ||
9662 | \contentsrightmargin = 0pt | ||
9663 | \defbodyindent = 2mm | ||
9664 | \tableindent = 12mm | ||
9665 | }} | ||
9666 | |||
9667 | % A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. | ||
9668 | \def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1 | ||
9669 | \afourpaper | ||
9670 | \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}% | ||
9671 | {\voffset}{4.6mm}% | ||
9672 | {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% | ||
9673 | {297mm}{210mm}% | ||
9674 | % | ||
9675 | % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper. | ||
9676 | \globaldefs = 0 | ||
9677 | }} | ||
9678 | |||
9679 | % Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format. | ||
9680 | \def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1 | ||
9681 | \afourpaper | ||
9682 | \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}% | ||
9683 | {\voffset}{-2.95mm}% | ||
9684 | {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% | ||
9685 | {297mm}{210mm}% | ||
9686 | \globaldefs = 0 | ||
9687 | }} | ||
9688 | |||
9689 | % @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH] | ||
9690 | % Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip, | ||
9691 | % and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow. | ||
9692 | % | ||
9693 | \parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish} | ||
9694 | \def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{% | ||
9695 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi | ||
9696 | \globaldefs = 1 | ||
9697 | % | ||
9698 | \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt | ||
9699 | \setleading{\textleading}% | ||
9700 | % | ||
9701 | \dimen0 = #1\relax | ||
9702 | \advance\dimen0 by \voffset | ||
9703 | % | ||
9704 | \dimen2 = \hsize | ||
9705 | \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset | ||
9706 | % | ||
9707 | \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}% | ||
9708 | {\voffset}{\normaloffset}% | ||
9709 | {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% | ||
9710 | {\dimen0}{\dimen2}% | ||
9711 | }} | ||
9712 | |||
9713 | % Set default to letter. | ||
9714 | % | ||
9715 | \letterpaper | ||
9716 | |||
9717 | |||
9718 | \message{and turning on texinfo input format.} | ||
9719 | |||
9720 | \def^^L{\par} % remove \outer, so ^L can appear in an @comment | ||
9721 | |||
9722 | % DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice. | ||
9723 | \catcode`\^^? = 14 | ||
9724 | |||
9725 | % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. | ||
9726 | \catcode`\"=\other \def\normaldoublequote{"} | ||
9727 | \catcode`\$=\other \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix | ||
9728 | \catcode`\+=\other \def\normalplus{+} | ||
9729 | \catcode`\<=\other \def\normalless{<} | ||
9730 | \catcode`\>=\other \def\normalgreater{>} | ||
9731 | \catcode`\^=\other \def\normalcaret{^} | ||
9732 | \catcode`\_=\other \def\normalunderscore{_} | ||
9733 | \catcode`\|=\other \def\normalverticalbar{|} | ||
9734 | \catcode`\~=\other \def\normaltilde{~} | ||
9735 | |||
9736 | % This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt | ||
9737 | % (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts, | ||
9738 | % where something hairier probably needs to be done. | ||
9739 | % | ||
9740 | % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print | ||
9741 | % otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero | ||
9742 | % interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all | ||
9743 | % typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter. | ||
9744 | % | ||
9745 | \def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi} | ||
9746 | |||
9747 | % Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches | ||
9748 | % non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from | ||
9749 | % italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway | ||
9750 | % this is not a problem. | ||
9751 | \def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi} | ||
9752 | |||
9753 | % Turn off all special characters except @ | ||
9754 | % (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary). | ||
9755 | % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can | ||
9756 | % use math or other variants that look better in normal text. | ||
9757 | |||
9758 | \catcode`\"=\active | ||
9759 | \def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}} | ||
9760 | \let"=\activedoublequote | ||
9761 | \catcode`\~=\active | ||
9762 | \def~{{\tt\char126}} | ||
9763 | \chardef\hat=`\^ | ||
9764 | \catcode`\^=\active | ||
9765 | \def^{{\tt \hat}} | ||
9766 | |||
9767 | \catcode`\_=\active | ||
9768 | \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} | ||
9769 | \let\realunder=_ | ||
9770 | % Subroutine for the previous macro. | ||
9771 | \def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em } | ||
9772 | |||
9773 | \catcode`\|=\active | ||
9774 | \def|{{\tt\char124}} | ||
9775 | \chardef \less=`\< | ||
9776 | \catcode`\<=\active | ||
9777 | \def<{{\tt \less}} | ||
9778 | \chardef \gtr=`\> | ||
9779 | \catcode`\>=\active | ||
9780 | \def>{{\tt \gtr}} | ||
9781 | \catcode`\+=\active | ||
9782 | \def+{{\tt \char 43}} | ||
9783 | \catcode`\$=\active | ||
9784 | \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix | ||
9785 | |||
9786 | % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file | ||
9787 | % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line. | ||
9788 | % So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on. | ||
9789 | % \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file. | ||
9790 | \def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other} | ||
9791 | |||
9792 | % Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after | ||
9793 | % parsing them. | ||
9794 | \def\turnoffactive{% | ||
9795 | \normalturnoffactive | ||
9796 | \otherbackslash | ||
9797 | } | ||
9798 | |||
9799 | \catcode`\@=0 | ||
9800 | |||
9801 | % \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font, | ||
9802 | % as in \char`\\. | ||
9803 | \global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\ | ||
9804 | \global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work | ||
9805 | |||
9806 | % \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and | ||
9807 | % \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines). | ||
9808 | {\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}} | ||
9809 | |||
9810 | % In texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash | ||
9811 | % in fixed width font. | ||
9812 | \catcode`\\=\active % @ for escape char from now on. | ||
9813 | |||
9814 | % The story here is that in math mode, the \char of \backslashcurfont | ||
9815 | % ends up printing the roman \ from the math symbol font (because \char | ||
9816 | % in math mode uses the \mathcode, and plain.tex sets | ||
9817 | % \mathcode`\\="026E). It seems better for @backslashchar{} to always | ||
9818 | % print a typewriter backslash, hence we use an explicit \mathchar, | ||
9819 | % which is the decimal equivalent of "715c (class 7, e.g., use \fam; | ||
9820 | % ignored family value; char position "5C). We can't use " for the | ||
9821 | % usual hex value because it has already been made active. | ||
9822 | @def@normalbackslash{{@tt @ifmmode @mathchar29020 @else @backslashcurfont @fi}} | ||
9823 | @let@backslashchar = @normalbackslash % @backslashchar{} is for user documents. | ||
9824 | |||
9825 | % On startup, @fixbackslash assigns: | ||
9826 | % @let \ = @normalbackslash | ||
9827 | % \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont. | ||
9828 | % \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with | ||
9829 | % catcode other. We switch back and forth between these. | ||
9830 | @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont} | ||
9831 | @gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash} | ||
9832 | |||
9833 | % Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of | ||
9834 | % the literal character `\'. | ||
9835 | % | ||
9836 | @def@normalturnoffactive{% | ||
9837 | @let"=@normaldoublequote | ||
9838 | @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix | ||
9839 | @let+=@normalplus | ||
9840 | @let<=@normalless | ||
9841 | @let>=@normalgreater | ||
9842 | @let\=@normalbackslash | ||
9843 | @let^=@normalcaret | ||
9844 | @let_=@normalunderscore | ||
9845 | @let|=@normalverticalbar | ||
9846 | @let~=@normaltilde | ||
9847 | @markupsetuplqdefault | ||
9848 | @markupsetuprqdefault | ||
9849 | @unsepspaces | ||
9850 | } | ||
9851 | |||
9852 | % Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily. | ||
9853 | % This is canceled by @fixbackslash. | ||
9854 | @otherifyactive | ||
9855 | |||
9856 | % If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up. | ||
9857 | % That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing | ||
9858 | % a backslash. | ||
9859 | % | ||
9860 | @gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash} | ||
9861 | @global@let\ = @eatinput | ||
9862 | |||
9863 | % On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then | ||
9864 | % the first `\' in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix | ||
9865 | % that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur. | ||
9866 | % Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input | ||
9867 | % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format. | ||
9868 | % | ||
9869 | @gdef@fixbackslash{% | ||
9870 | @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi | ||
9871 | @catcode`+=@active | ||
9872 | @catcode`@_=@active | ||
9873 | } | ||
9874 | |||
9875 | % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages. | ||
9876 | @escapechar = `@@ | ||
9877 | |||
9878 | % These (along with & and #) are made active for url-breaking, so need | ||
9879 | % active definitions as the normal characters. | ||
9880 | @def@normaldot{.} | ||
9881 | @def@normalquest{?} | ||
9882 | @def@normalslash{/} | ||
9883 | |||
9884 | % These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. | ||
9885 | % @hashchar{} gets its own user-level command, because of #line. | ||
9886 | @catcode`@& = @other @def@normalamp{&} | ||
9887 | @catcode`@# = @other @def@normalhash{#} | ||
9888 | @catcode`@% = @other @def@normalpercent{%} | ||
9889 | |||
9890 | @let @hashchar = @normalhash | ||
9891 | |||
9892 | @c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and | ||
9893 | @c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}. If we | ||
9894 | @c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars. | ||
9895 | @c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments. | ||
9896 | @catcode`@'=@active | ||
9897 | @catcode`@`=@active | ||
9898 | @markupsetuplqdefault | ||
9899 | @markupsetuprqdefault | ||
9900 | |||
9901 | @c Local variables: | ||
9902 | @c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) | ||
9903 | @c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message" | ||
9904 | @c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{" | ||
9905 | @c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" | ||
9906 | @c time-stamp-end: "}" | ||
9907 | @c End: | ||
9908 | |||
9909 | @c vim:sw=2: | ||
9910 | |||
9911 | @ignore | ||
9912 | arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115 | ||
9913 | @end ignore | ||